2009 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint System ............................. 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats .............................................. 1-10
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-12
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-31
Airbag System
......................................... 1-55
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-70
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks ...................................... 2-10
Windows ................................................. 2-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-19
Mirrors .................................................... 2-37
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-39
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-42
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-49
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-19
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-24
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-42
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-64
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle
....... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-27
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
All-Wheel Drive
........................................ 5-41
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-43
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-44
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-49
Tires
...................................................... 5-51
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-88
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-96
Electrical System ...................................... 5-96
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-103
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-16
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
........... 7-18
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
Canadian Owners
(Propriétaires Canadiens)
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès du concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and
the name EQUINOX are registered trademarks
of General Motors Corporation.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
This manual includes the latest information at the time
it was printed. GM reserves the right to make changes
after that time without notice. For vehicles first sold
in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors
of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division
wherever it appears in this manual.
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue française
www.helminc.com
Index
This manual describes features that may or may not be
on your specific vehicle.
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the
index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of
what is in the manual and the page number where it can
be found.
Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about
the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures, symbols,
and words work together to explain vehicle operation.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15910163 B Second Printing
ii
©
2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do this,”
or “Do not let this happen.”
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
Many times, this damage would not be covered by the
vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice
tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or Notice.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about things
that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore the
warning.
Vehicle Symbols
{ CAUTION:
The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols
instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text
describing the operation or information relating to a
specific component, control, message, gage, or indicator.
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
*:
Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.
This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
iii
Vehicle Symbol Chart
.:
Fuel Gage
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
+:
Fuses
9:
Airbag Readiness Light
#:
Air Conditioning
!:
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g:
Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$:
Brake System Warning Light
":
I:
Charging System
Cruise Control
B:
Engine Coolant Temperature
O:
Exterior Lamps
#:
Fog Lamps
iv
i:
j:
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
LATCH System Child Restraints
*:
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
::
Oil Pressure
}:
Power
/:
Remote Vehicle Start
>:
Safety Belt Reminders
7:
Tire Pressure Monitor
F:
Traction Control
M:
Windshield Washer Fluid
Section 1
Seats and Restraint System
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Manual Seats ................................................1-2
Seat Height Adjuster .......................................1-3
Power Seat ...................................................1-3
Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-4
Heated Seats .................................................1-4
Manual Reclining Seatbacks .............................1-5
Head Restraints .............................................1-7
Passenger Folding Seatback ............................1-8
Rear Seats .....................................................1-10
Split Folding Rear Seat .................................1-10
Safety Belts ...................................................1-12
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-12
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-17
Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-25
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-30
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-30
Child Restraints .............................................1-31
Older Children ..............................................1-31
Infants and Young Children ............................1-34
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-37
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-40
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) ......................................1-42
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ....................................1-49
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ............................1-52
Airbag System ...............................................1-55
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-58
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-60
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-61
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-61
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-62
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-63
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-68
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............................1-68
Restraint System Check ..................................1-70
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-70
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-71
1-1
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{ CAUTION:
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
1-2
Seat Height Adjuster
Power Seat
To manually raise or lower the seat, move the lever
repeatedly upward or downward.
To adjust the seat:
• Slide the control forward or rearward to move the
seat forward or rearward.
• Move the front and rear of the control up or down to
raise or lower the front and rear part of the seat
cushion.
1-3
Manual Lumbar
Heated Seats
On vehicles with this
feature, the knob is located
on the front of the driver
seat lower cushion on
the inboard side.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the lumbar support.
1-4
On vehicles with heated
seats, the switches are
located on the instrument
panel near the climate
controls.
The vehicle must be on for the heated seats to operate.
Press the switch, nearest to the seat, once to turn the
heated seat on to the high setting. Both indicator lights
will be lit. Press the switch a second time to turn the
heated seat to the low setting. One indicator light will
be lit. Press the switch a third time to turn the heated
seat off.
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Driver’s Seat shown, Passenger Seat similar
{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever on the outboard side
of the seat and move the seatback to the desired position.
Then release the lever to lock the seatback in place. If the
passenger’s seat is a flat folding seat, fully raise the lever
to disengage the seatback.
1-5
{ CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in
motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up,
the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will
not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front
of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving
neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-6
Head Restraints
Pull the head restraint up to
raise it. To lower the head
restraint, press the button,
located on the top of the
seatback, and push the
restraint down.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s head.
This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in
a crash.
1-7
Passenger Folding Seatback
On vehicles with this feature, to fold the seatback:
1. Lower the head restraint all the way.
{ CAUTION:
If you fold the seatback forward to carry longer
objects, such as skis, be sure any such cargo is
not near an airbag. In a crash, an inflating airbag
might force that object toward a person. This could
cause severe injury or even death. Secure objects
away from the area in which an airbag would
inflate. For more information, see Where Are the
Airbags? on page 1-58 and Loading the Vehicle
on page 4-21.
2. Lift the bar under the front of the seat to unlock it.
Slide the seat as far back as it will go and release
the bar. Try to move the seat back and forth to
make sure it is locked into place.
{ CAUTION:
Things you put on this seatback can strike and
injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a
crash. Remove or secure all items before driving.
1-8
3. Lift up fully on the recliner lever, located on the
outboard side of the seat, and fold the seatback
forward until it disengages.
To raise the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift up fully on the recliner lever, located on the
outboard side of the seat, and push up on the
seatback.
2. Continue raising the seatback until the seatback
re-engages.
{ CAUTION:
4. Continue to fold the seat forward until it locks in the
folded position.
5. Pull up on the seatback to be sure it is locked.
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked in place.
The recliner lever is also used to recline the seatback
while a passenger is seated. See Manual Reclining
Seatbacks on page 1-5.
1-9
Rear Seats
{ CAUTION:
Split Folding Rear Seat
The rear split bench seatbacks have three available
positions — folded forward, upright, or partially reclined.
Both of the seatbacks can be moved to any of the
three positions independent of the other seatback
position. The rear bench seat can also be moved
forward and rearward.
{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
1-10
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly
attached, or twisted will not provide the protection
needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached, and are
not twisted.
To fold the seatback down, do the following:
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still
fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety
belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return
them to their normal stowed position before folding
a rear seat.
1. Ensure all three of the safety belts are unbuckled
and the front seatbacks are not reclined.
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift and hold the lever located on top of the
seatback.
2. Tilt the seatback rearward, then release the lever
when the seatback is in the desired position.
To slide the entire seat forward or rearward, do the
following:
1. Lift and hold the release bar located under the front
of the seat cushion to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired position.
3. Release the bar.
4. Try to move the seat back and forth to ensure the
seat is locked in place.
2. Lift the lever located on the top of the seatback to
release the seatback.
3. Fold the seatback forward to the desired position.
1-11
Safety Belts
{ CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This section of the manual describes how to use
safety belts properly. It also describes some things not
to do with safety belts.
{ CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
1-12
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-27
for additional information.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without safety belts, they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-13
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-14
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-15
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
a crash — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a
good driver does not protect you from things
beyond your control, such as bad drivers.
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you
are upside down.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
am wearing a safety belt?
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
1-16
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules for
smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the
vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-31 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-34. Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the
vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
1-17
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-18
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
1-20
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-21
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs like
your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-22
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-23
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-24
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature
may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-30.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you.
See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later
in this section for instructions on use and
important safety information.
1-25
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
For outboard seating positions, slide the latch plate up
the safety belt webbing when the safety belt is not in use.
The latch plate should rest on the stitching on the safety
belt, near the guide loop.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of
the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.
1-26
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger seating positions.
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the
safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe
frontal and near frontal crash if the threshold conditions
for pretensioner activation are met.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Squeeze the release
buttons (A) together and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced,
and probably other new parts for the vehicle’s safety
belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash on page 1-71.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
After the height adjuster is set to the desired position,
try to move it up or down without squeezing the release
buttons to make sure it has locked into position.
1-27
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the back
of the seatback.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
2. Place the guide over the belt, and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1-28
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt
edges together so that the safety belt can be removed
from the guide. Slide the guide back onto its storage clip
located on the seatback.
1-29
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/retailer
will order you an extender. When you go in to order it,
take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will
be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do
not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it
is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it
to the regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-30
Child Restraints
Older Children
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using
the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear Safety
Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 1-25 for more information. If the shoulder belt
still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the
booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the length
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the
booster seat.
• If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional
restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
1-31
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,
just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt
force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-25.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system
or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating
position.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-32
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
1-33
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
1-34
system is designed for them. Every time infants and
young children ride in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate child restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike other
people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will
suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
CAUTION:
(Continued)
1-35
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{ CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a
motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety
standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-36
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant’s neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{ CAUTION:
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce
the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
A rear-facing infant seat (A)
provides restraint with the
seating surface against the
back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
1-37
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-38
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-42 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from
the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when
no child is in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
1-39
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children and child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are large enough, using
safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
CAUTION:
1-40
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the
right front passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-63 for
additional information.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, we
recommend that rear-facing child restraints not be
transported in your vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
Configurations for Use of Child
Restraints
A. Child restraint using
LATCH
B. Occupant prohibited
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint
in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.
If you need to secure more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, review the following illustrations. Depending on
where you place the child restraint or the size of the child
restraint, you may not be able to access certain safety
belt assemblies or LATCH anchors for additional
passengers or child restraints.
A. Occupant prohibited
B. Child restraint using
LATCH
1-41
A. Child restraint using
LATCH
B. Occupant prohibited
C. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
A. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
A. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
B. Child restraint using
LATCH
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-42
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle.
The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order
to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
1-43
Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.
Rear Seat
Each rear seating position has exposed metal anchors
located in the crease between the seatback and the
seat cushion.
1-44
rear cargo area to access the anchors. Be sure to use an
anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-40 for additional
information.
The top tether anchors for each rear seating position are
located on the back of the rear seatback. You may need
to adjust the rear compartment storage panel/cover in the
1-45
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{ CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be
seriously injured or killed. Install a LATCH-type
child restraint properly using the anchors, or use
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with the child
restraint and the instructions in this manual.
{ CAUTION:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor
or attachment to come loose or even break during
a crash. A child or others could be injured. To
reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor.
1-46
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the
safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any unused
safety belts behind the child restraint so children
cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt all the
way out of the retractor to set the lock, if your
vehicle has one, after the child restraint has been
installed.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to
its stowed position, before folding the seat.
anchors and child restraint attachments to secure the
restraints. Some restraints also use another vehicle
anchor to secure a top tether.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
A. Passenger’s Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
B. Center Rear Seat Lower Anchors
C. Driver’s Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
Make sure to attach the child restraint at the proper
anchor location.
This system is designed to make installation of child
restraints easier. When using lower anchors, do not use
the vehicle’s safety belts. Instead use the vehicle’s
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and the
following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. You may need to adjust the rear compartment
storage panel/cover in the rear cargo area to
access the anchors. See Rear Compartment
Storage Panel/Cover on page 2-45.
1-47
2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether around the
headrest or head restraint.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
raise the headrest or head
restraint and route the
tether under the headrest
or head restraint and in
between the headrest or
head restraint posts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-48
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position,
study the instructions that came with the child restraint
to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in
the child restraint when and as the instructions say.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42
for how and where to install the child restraint using
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using
a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42 for top
tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed
in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
Restraint on page 1-40.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-49
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-50
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42 for
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety
belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top
tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing
child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
1-51
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place
to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where
to Put the Restraint on page 1-40.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-63 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-29
for more information, including important safety
information.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-63 for
additional information.
1-52
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42
for how and where to install the child restraint using
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42 for top tether anchor
locations.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that came
with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 3-29.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-53
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-54
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing
child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
7. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat and your
child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42 for
more information.
Airbag System
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Your vehicle may have the following airbags:
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and the
passenger seated directly behind that passenger.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator
is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint”
under Passenger Sensing System on page 1-63 for more
information.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety
belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top
tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
1-55
Even if you do not have a right front passenger seat in
your vehicle there is still an active frontal airbag in the
right side of the instrument panel. Do not place cargo in
front of this airbag.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Be sure that cargo is not near an airbag. In a crash,
an inflating airbag might force that object toward a
person. This could cause severe injury or even
death. Secure objects away from the area in which
an airbag would inflate. For more information, see
Where Are the Airbags? on page 1-58 and Loading
the Vehicle on page 4-21.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from
the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very
quickly to do their job.
1-56
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags
are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only restraint. See
When Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-60.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the blink
of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to
the airbag, as you would be if you were sitting on
the edge of your seat or leaning forward. Safety
belts help keep you in position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can provide.
Always secure children properly in your vehicle.
To read how, see Older Children on page 1-31 or
Infants and Young Children on page 1-34.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
roof-rail airbags.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-28
for more information.
1-57
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.
1-58
{ CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an airbag,
the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force
the object into that person causing severe injury or
even death. The path of an inflating airbag must
be kept clear. Do not put anything between an
occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near
any other airbag covering.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do, the
path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right
front passenger, and second row outboard passengers,
they are in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-59
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or right
front passenger’s head and chest. However, they are only
designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined
deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used
to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and
how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object does not deform.
1-60
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash
severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal sensors,
which help the sensing system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal
impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more
severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Your vehicle may or may not have roof-rail airbags.
See Airbag System on page 1-55. Roof-rail airbags are
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
In addition, these roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate
during a rollover. Roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash
severity is above the system’s designed threshold level.
The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near-frontal impacts, or rear impacts. Both
roof-rail airbags will deploy when either side of the vehicle
is struck or if the sensing system predicts that the vehicle
is about to roll over.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag
should have inflated simply because of the damage to
a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what the
vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly the
vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags, deployment
is determined by the location and severity of the side
impact. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag deployment
is determined by the direction of the roll.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator, the
airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag
module.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the
vehicle, near the side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
help contain the head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the first and second rows.
The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can prevent all such
ejections.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 1-60 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
1-61
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate,
so quickly that some people may not even realize an
airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after they deploy.
Some components of the airbag module may be hot
for several minutes. For location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-61.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving
the vehicle.
1-62
{ CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but cannot get
out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the hazard
warning flashers on when the airbags inflate. You can
lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and turn the
hazard warning flashers off by using the controls for
those features.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional
windshield breakage may also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the
airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include airbag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for the
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
Passenger Sensing System
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible on the instrument
panel when the vehicle is started.
• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 7-18 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-18.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag
system will not work properly. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, will
be visible during the system check. When the system
check is complete, either the word ON or the word OFF,
or the symbol for on or off, will be visible. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-29.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbags are not affected by the passenger
sensing system.
1-63
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger seat.
The sensors are designed to detect the presence
of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the
right front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
1-64
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, we
recommend that rear-facing child restraints not be
transported in your vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag if:
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal
airbag, depending upon the person’s seating posture
and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-29.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-28
for more information, including important safety
information.
1-65
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters,
or seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 1-52.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle
off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and
adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure
that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child
restraint into the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 1-7.
6. Restart the vehicle.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child restraint
in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check
with your dealer/retailer.
1-66
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters,
or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,
seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well
the passenger sensing system operates. We recommend
that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket
equipment except when approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-68 for more information about
modifications that can affect how the system operates.
{ CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in
the Index for additional information about the importance
of proper restraint use.
1-67
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the
service manual have information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 7-17.
{ CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
1-68
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts of
the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel,
roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar
garnish trim, overhead console, front sensors, side
impact sensors, rollover sensor module, or airbag
wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger seat.
The passenger sensing system may not operate
properly if the original seat trim is replaced with
non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM
covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different
vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat
heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing
system. This could either prevent proper deployment
of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
System on page 1-63.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
If you have any questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see
Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 5-70 for
additional important information.
1-69
Restraint System Check
Airbags
Checking the Restraint Systems
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-28 for more information.
Safety Belts
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-27 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 5-91.
1-70
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened, or
broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not
open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag
covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
Airbag Inflate? on page 1-61. See your dealer/retailer
for service.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{ CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and any
necessary replacements made as soon as possible.
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during
any crash may have been stressed or damaged.
See your dealer/retailer to have the safety belt
assemblies inspected or replaced.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not
being used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle
has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started, or while you are driving.
See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-28.
1-71
✍ NOTES
1-72
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation ...................................................2-5
Remote Vehicle Start ......................................2-7
Doors and Locks ............................................2-10
Door Locks ..................................................2-10
Power Door Locks ........................................2-10
Delayed Locking ...........................................2-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-11
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-11
Lockout Protection ........................................2-12
Liftgate ........................................................2-12
Windows ........................................................2-14
Power Windows ............................................2-15
Sun Visors ...................................................2-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-16
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-17
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer .............2-17
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation .................................................2-18
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-19
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-19
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-20
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-21
Starting the Engine .......................................2-21
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-23
Automatic Transmission Operation
(3.4L V6 with 5-Speed) ..............................2-24
Automatic Transmission Operation
(3.6L V6 with 6-Speed) ..............................2-27
Parking Brake ..............................................2-31
Shifting Into Park ..........................................2-32
Shifting Out of Park ......................................2-33
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-34
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-35
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................2-36
Mirrors ...........................................................2-37
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-37
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................2-37
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-38
Outside Convex Mirrors .................................2-38
2-1
Section 2
Features and Controls
OnStar® System .............................................2-39
Storage Areas ................................................2-42
Glove Box ...................................................2-42
Cupholders ..................................................2-42
Center Console Storage .................................2-42
Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-43
2-2
Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover ..........2-45
Rear Seat Armrest ........................................2-47
Table ..........................................................2-47
Convenience Net ..........................................2-48
Cargo Tie Downs ..........................................2-48
Sunroof .........................................................2-49
Keys
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and all locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.
Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-7 for more information.
2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If this vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, it operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-4
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too
far from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for
service.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4.
Q (Lock):
Press to lock the doors and liftgate.
If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),
the parking lamps flash once to indicate locking has
occurred. If enabled through the DIC, the horn chirps
when Q is pressed again within five seconds. See DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-57 for additional
information.
Pressing Q may arm the content theft-deterrent system.
See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-17.
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock the driver door.
If K is pressed again within five seconds, all remaining
doors and the liftgate unlock. The interior lamps
come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition
is turned on. If enabled through the DIC, the parking
lamps flash twice to indicate unlocking has occurred.
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-57.
With Remote Start
Shown, Without Remote
Start Similar
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this
feature, press to start the engine from outside the
vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote
Vehicle Start on page 2-7 for additional information.
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter disarms the content
theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-17.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
to locate the vehicle. The turn signal lamps flash and
the horn sounds three times.
2-5
Press and hold L for more than two seconds to
activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps flash and
the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm
turns off when the ignition is moved to ON/RUN or L is
pressed again. The ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for the
panic alarm to work.
Battery Replacement
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the transmitter.
The RKE transmitter is used to arm/disarm the content
theft-deterrent system. The theft-deterrent system can
be programmed to three different modes. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-17.
If you accidentally set off the alarm when entering or
exiting the vehicle, press Q or K once or L twice
to turn it off.
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle
will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen transmitters
no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed.
Each vehicle can have up to four transmitters
programmed to it. See “Learn Remote Key” under
DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-42.
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the notch on the side.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
2-6
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have the remote start feature.
This feature allows you to start the engine from
outside the vehicle. See “REMOTE START” under DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-57 for instructions
on how to enable and disable this feature.
During a remote start, the climate control system will
turn on at the fan, temperature, and mode settings the
vehicle was set to when the vehicle was last turned
off. The rear window defogger will also turn on.
If your vehicle has heated seats, they may turn on
during colder outside temperatures and will shut
off when the key is turned to ON/RUN. You may not
notice an increase in seat surface temperature until
the seat is occupied for a short period of time.
Laws in some local communities may restrict the use
of remote starters. For example, some laws may require
a person using remote start to have the vehicle in
view when doing so. Check local regulations for
any requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, do not use the remote
start feature. The vehicle may run out of fuel.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range
of operation. However, the range may be less while
the vehicle is running.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4 for additional
information.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): This button will be on the
RKE transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the engine using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the RKE transmitter, that has a remote vehicle
start button, at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button, then
immediately press and hold the remote vehicle start
button. Hold the remote start button until the vehicle’s
turn signal lamps flash, or for at least four seconds
if the vehicle’s lights are not visible. The vehicle’s
doors will be locked.
Pressing the remote start button again after the
vehicle has started will turn off the ignition.
When the vehicle’s engine starts, the parking lamps
will turn on and remain on while the engine is
running.
2-7
3. To extend the engine run time by 10 minutes,
repeat Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is still running.
The engine run time can only be extended if it is the
first remote start since the vehicle has been driven.
Remote start can be extended one time.
If the remote start procedure is used again before
the first 10 minute time frame has ended, the first
10 minutes will immediately expire and the second
10 minute time frame will start.
For example, if the lock button and then the remote
start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle
has been running for five minutes, 10 minutes are
added, allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes.
4. After entering the vehicle during a remote start,
insert and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the
vehicle.
After a remote start, the engine will automatically
shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension
has been done or the vehicle’s key is inserted
into the ignition switch and turned to ON/RUN.
2-8
A maximum of two remote starts or remote start
attempts are allowed between ignition cycles.
After your vehicle’s engine has been started two times
using the remote start button, the vehicle’s ignition
switch must be turned to ON/RUN and then back to
LOCK/OFF using the key before the remote start
procedure can be used again.
To manually shut off the engine after a remote start,
do any of the following:
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
the remote start button until the parking lamps
turn off.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Insert the vehicle’s key into the ignition switch
and turn the switch to ON/RUN and then back to
LOCK/OFF.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if any
of the following occur:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.
The vehicle’s hood, liftgate or doors are not closed.
The hazard warning flashers are on.
There is an emission control system malfunction.
The engine coolant temperature is too high.
The oil pressure is low.
Two remote vehicle starts have already been used.
The maximum number of remote starts or remote
start attempts between ignition cycles with the key
is two.
Remote Start Ready
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature.
This feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.
If your vehicle has the remote start ready feature,
your RKE transmitter will have extended range that
will allow you to lock or unlock your vehicle from
approximately 195 feet (60 m) away.
See your dealer/retailer if you would like to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to your
vehicle.
• The remote start feature may be disabled.
The system may be enabled or disabled through
the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-57 for additional
information.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are
shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle start
system enabled.
2-9
Doors and Locks
To lock or unlock a door, use the key from the outside
or the door lock from the inside.
Door Locks
Power Door Locks
{ CAUTION:
The power door lock switches are located on the
driver’s and front passenger’s doors.
K (Unlock):
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle.
When a door is locked, the handle will not
open it. The chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are
not locked. So, all passengers should wear
safety belts properly and the doors should
be locked whenever the vehicle is driven.
• Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
Locking your doors can help prevent this from
happening.
2-10
To unlock the doors, press the unlock
symbol.
Q (Lock):
Remove the key and press the lock symbol
to lock all of the doors.
Delayed Locking
A chime will sound three times to indicate a door or
liftgate is open when you try to lock the doors with the
power door lock switch. The doors will not lock, and the
theft-deterrent system will not arm until all the doors
are closed and ten seconds have passed.
The delayed locking feature can be programmed
through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-57.
See also Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2-5.
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
Your vehicle has an automatic lock/unlock feature which
enables you to program the power door locks through
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-57 for more information
on DIC programming.
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle has rear door security locks that prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
To set the security locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the lock above the rear door
security lock label and turn it to the horizontal
position.
2. Close the door.
3. Repeat the steps for the other rear door.
To open a rear door while the security lock is on, do the
following:
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, the front door power lock switch, or
the rear door manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each rear
door. You must open the
rear doors to access them.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the slot next to the rear door
security lock label and turn it to the vertical
position.
3. Repeat the steps for the other lock.
2-11
Lockout Protection
If you press the power door lock switch when the key is
in the ignition and any door is open, all the doors will lock
and only the driver’s door will unlock. Be sure to remove
the key from the ignition when locking your vehicle.
If the keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the doors
and the key is in the ignition, a chime will sound three
times. All passenger doors will lock, but the driver’s door
will remain unlocked.
Liftgate
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or
liftglass open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas
can come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even
death. If you must drive with the liftgate open or if
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
electrical wiring or other cable connections must
pass through the seal between the body and the
liftgate or liftglass:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your climate control system to
its highest speed and select the control setting
that will force outside air into your vehicle.
See “Climate Control System” in the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-35.
To unlock the liftgate, press the unlock button on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice or use the
power door lock switch.
To lock the liftgate, press the lock button on the
RKE transmitter or use the power door lock switch.
The liftgate does not have a key lock cylinder.
To open the liftgate, press the touchpad centered on
the underside of the liftgate handle and pull up.
When closing the liftgate, use the molded handles to
pull the liftgate down. Push the liftgate closed until
it latches.
2-12
Liftgate Operation with Loss of Power
The liftgate is equipped with an electric latch. If the
battery is disconnected or has low voltage, the liftgate
will not open.
Use a tool to push the
service release lever
located on the latch until
you hear or feel the gate
release.
To open the liftgate if
this happens, remove the
interior trim plug located at
the base of the liftgate from
inside the vehicle.
The liftgate can now be opened and closed manually.
You will need to use this procedure to open the
liftgate until the power is restored.
2-13
Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
2-14
Power Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
The window switches for all doors are located on the
center console. A window switch for each rear window is
located on each rear door.
To open or close a window press or pull the switch.
The power windows operate when the ignition is
in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or while in Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 2-21.
2-15
Express-Down Window
Sun Visors
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature that allows the window to be lowered without
holding the switch. Press the switch part way, and
the driver’s window opens a small amount. Press the
switch down all the way, release it, and the window
goes down automatically.
To block out glare, swing the sun visor down. You can
also detach the driver’s sun visor from the center mount
and slide it along the rod from side-to-side for greater
coverage.
To stop the window while it is lowering, press and
release the switch.
Your vehicle has covered visor vanity mirrors on both
the driver’s and passenger’s side.
Window Lockout
o (Window Lockout):
Your vehicle has a lockout
feature to prevent rear seat passengers from operating
the windows. Press the lockout button, located with
the power window switches, to turn the feature on and
off. The switch has a light that comes on when the
switch is active.
2-16
Visor Vanity Mirrors
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle has a content theft-deterrent alarm system.
To activate the theft-deterrent system:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. If you are
using the RKE transmitter, the door does not need to
be open.
3. Close all doors.
The key must be removed from the ignition to arm
the system.
If the theft-deterrent system is activated and a door or
the liftgate is opened without using the RKE transmitter,
a 10 second pre-alarm will occur, and the security light
will flash. The horn will sound rapidly for 10 seconds.
If you do not press unlock on the RKE transmitter or
insert the key in the ignition and turn if from the LOCK/
OFF position, the alarm will go off. The horn will sound
and the headlamps will flash for 30 seconds.
After the alarm has sounded for 30 seconds, the system
will re-arm itself automatically.
To disarm the theft-deterrent system, do one of the
following:
1. Unlock the doors with the RKE transmitter.
2. Insert the key in the ignition and turn it from the
LOCK/OFF position.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
The PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.
2-17
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically disarmed when the key
is turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or START
from the LOCK/OFF position.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
2-18
If the engine does not start and the security light on
the instrument panel comes on when trying to start the
vehicle, there may be a problem with your theft-deterrent
system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you
may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-97. If the engine still does not start
with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your
vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your
dealer/retailer who can service the PASS-Key® III+
to have a new key made. In an emergency, contact
Roadside Assistance.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to “learn”
the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up to
nine additional keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost
or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer or a
locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have keys
made and programmed to the system.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
To program the new additional key:
1. Verify that the new key has a
1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not
start, see your dealer/retailer for service.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn
it to the ON/RUN position within five seconds of
removing the original key.
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer on page 4-34 for the trailer towing
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-19
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch has
four different positions.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.
9 (LOCK/OFF):
This position locks the ignition and
steering column, with the key removed. You will only be
able to remove the key when the ignition is turned to
LOCK/OFF.
The ignition switch cannot be turned to LOCK/OFF
unless the shift lever is in P (Park).
In order to shift out of P (Park), ignition must be in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular
brake pedal must be applied.
2-20
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center.
If this happens, move the steering wheel from right
to left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.
If this does not work, then the vehicle needs service.
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is the position in which
you can operate some electrical accessories.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
R (ON/RUN):
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
This position can be used to operate the
electrical accessories and to display some instrument
panel cluster warning and indicator lights. The switch
stays in this position when the engine is running. If you
leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
position with the engine off, the battery could be drained.
You may not be able to start the vehicle if the battery is
allowed to drain for an extended period of time.
/ (START):
This is the position that starts the engine.
When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition
switch returns to ON/RUN for driving.
• Audio System
• Power Windows
• Sunroof (if equipped)
Power to these accessories will continue to operate for
up to 10 minutes or until the driver door is opened.
All these features will work when the key is in ON/RUN
or ACC/ACCESSORY.
Starting the Engine
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral).
The engine will not start in any other position.
To restart the engine when the vehicle is already
moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle
is stopped.
2-21
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go of
the key. The idle speed will slow down as the engine
warms. Do not race the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine and transmission
gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate
all moving parts.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned
to the START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
If the engine does not start and the key is held in
START, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds
to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent gear
damage, this system also prevents cranking if the
engine is already running. Engine cranking can be
stopped by turning the ignition switch to the ACC/
ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
2-22
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way
to the floor and holding it there as you hold the
key in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds.
Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow
the cranking motor to cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle
starts briefly but then stops again, repeat these
steps. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently until the
oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the engine
operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check
with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
with an engine coolant heater should be plugged in at
least four hours before starting. An internal thermostat
in the plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above
0°F (−18°C).
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the passenger side of the
engine compartment, near the radiator.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{ CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into
a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC
outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts, to prevent damage.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in
the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the
best advice on this.
2-23
Automatic Transmission Operation
(3.4L V6 with 5-Speed)
The shift lever is located on the center console. When
you change gears, the different shift positions will display
on the instrument panel cluster.
There are several different positions for the automatic
transmission.
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start the engine
because the vehicle cannot move easily.
2-24
{ CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park on page 2-32. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-34.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You must
fully apply the brake pedal and then press the shift
lever button before you can shift from P (Park)
when the ignition key is in ON/RUN.
If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into
P (Park) as you maintain brake application. Then press
the shift lever button and move the shift lever into another
gear. See Shifting Out of Park on page 2-33.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, see If
Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 4-20.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when
the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
{ CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
Notice: Shifting to a drive gear from NEUTRAL (N)
while the vehicle is moving could damage the
transmission. Make sure the vehicle is stopped
before shifting from NEUTRAL (N) into a drive gear.
2-25
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving with
the automatic transmission. It provides the best fuel
economy. If you need more power for passing, and
you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the accelerator
all the way down.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
Control on page 4-12.
I (Intermediate): This position is also used for normal
driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed without
using the brakes for slight downgrades where the
vehicle would otherwise accelerate due to steepness
of grade. If constant upshifting or downshifting occurs
while driving up steep hills, this position can be used
to prevent repetitive types of shifts. You might choose
I (Intermediate) instead of D (Drive) when driving on hilly,
winding roads and when towing a trailer, so that there is
less shifting between gears.
L (Low): This position reduces vehicle speed more
than I (Intermediate) without actually using the brakes.
You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow
or mud. If the shift lever is placed in L (Low), the
transmission will not shift into L (Low) until the vehicle
is going slowly enough.
2-26
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. The repair will not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Transmission Overheating
If the transmission fluid temperature rises above
284°F (140°C) or rises rapidly, the Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light will flash. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 3-32 for
more information. When the transmission overheats it
will go into a protection mode and will default shift into
fifth gear if in the D (Drive) position, or second gear if
in the L (Low) position. Continue driving the vehicle in
either position depending on the required vehicle speed
and load. Once the fluid temperature lowers to the normal
temperature range, the transmission will return to the
normal shift patterns. Towing or driving on long hills can
cause the transmission fluid temperature to be higher
than normal. If the transmission fluid temperature will
not cool, you may need to pull over and check the
transmission fluid level. You should also check the
engine coolant temperature. If it is hot, see Engine
Overheating on page 5-28.
Automatic Transmission Operation
(3.6L V6 with 6-Speed)
The shift lever for the automatic transmission is located
on the console between the seats.
Maximum engine speed is limited when the vehicle is in
P (Park) or N (Neutral) to protect driveline components
from improper operation.
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is
the best position to use when the engine is started
because the vehicle cannot move easily.
{ CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park on page 2-32. If you are pulling a trailer,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-34.
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
When using the MSM (Manual Shift Mode), a number
indicating the gear selected will appear on the instrument
cluster below the shift position display. For more
information on the manual shift option see “Manual
Shift Mode” in this section.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park)
before starting the engine. The vehicle has an
automatic transmission shift lock control system.
You must fully apply the brake pedal and then
press the shift lever button, before you can shift
from P (Park) when the ignition is in ON/RUN.
2-27
If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the
shift lever and push the shift lever all way into P (Park)
as you maintain brake application. Then press the
shift lever button and move the shift lever into another
gear. See Shifting Out of Park on page 2-33.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, see If
Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 4-20.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when
the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
2-28
{ CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides
the best fuel economy. If the vehicle needs more power
for passing, and it is:
MSM (Manual Shift Mode)
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down.
The vehicle will shift down to the next gear and have
more power.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see Skidding under Loss of
Control on page 4-12.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. The repair will not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
MSM (Manual Shift Mode): This position, available on
the models with the MSM (Manual Shift Mode), allows
you to change gears similar to a manual transmission.
If the vehicle has this feature, see “MSM (Manual
Shift Mode)”.
To use this feature, do the following:
1. Move the shift lever from D (Drive) to the left into
the manual gate.
While driving in manual shift mode, the transmission
will remain in the driver gear selected. When coming
to a stop in the manual position, the vehicle will
automatically shift to 1 (First) gear.
2. Push the shift lever forward toward the plus (+) to
upshift or rearward toward the minus (−) to downshift.
When using the MSM (Manual Shift Mode) the
number of the gear selected will appear on the
instrument cluster below the shift position display.
2-29
In manual shift mode all six forward gears can be
selected.
While using the MSM (Manual Shift Mode) feature
the vehicle will have operation similar to a manual
transmission. You can use this for sport driving or when
driving hilly roads to stay in gear longer or to downshift
for more power or engine braking.
The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears
appropriate for the vehicle speed:
• The transmission will not automatically shift to the
next higher gear without moving the shift lever.
• The transmission will not allow shifting to the next
lower gear if the vehicle speed is too high.
If the vehicle does not respond to a gear change,
or detects a problem with the transmission, the range
of gears may be reduced and the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp will come on. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-34.
2-30
Transmission Overheating
If the transmission fluid temperature rises above
270°F (132°C) or rises rapidly, the Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light will flash. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 3-32 for
more information. When the transmission overheats
it will go into a protection mode and will default into a
different shift sequence to help cool the transmission
fluid. This shift sequence is the same for both D (Drive)
position and manual mode. Continue driving the vehicle
in either position depending on the required vehicle
speed and load. Once the fluid temperature lowers to the
normal temperature range, the transmission will return to
the normal shift patterns. Towing or driving on long hills
can cause the transmission fluid temperature to be higher
than normal. If the transmission fluid temperature will
not cool, you may need to pull over and check the
transmission fluid level. You should also check the
engine coolant temperature. If it is hot, see Engine
Overheating on page 5-28.
2 (Second) and 3 (Third) Gear Start
Feature
Parking Brake
When accelerating the vehicle from a stop in snowy
and icy conditions, you may want to select 2 (Second)
and 3 (Third) gear. A higher gear, and light application of
the gas pedal, may allow you to gain more traction on
slippery surfaces.
With the MSM (Manual Shift Mode), the vehicle can
accelerate from a stop in 2 (Second) or 3 (Third).
1. Move the shift lever from D (Drive) into the
manual gate.
2. With the vehicle stopped, move the shift lever
forward to select 2 (Second) or 3 (Third).
The vehicle will start from a stop position
in 2 (Second) or 3 (Third).
3. Once the vehicle is moving select the desired
drive gear or move the shift lever to the D (Drive)
position.
The parking brake lever is located to the right of the
driver seat.
2-31
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition
is on, the brake system warning light will come on.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press
the release button. Hold the release button in as you
move the brake lever all the way down.
Make sure to release the parking brake before driving
the vehicle.
If the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving
at least 4 mph (6 km/h), a chime will activate to remind
you to release the parking brake.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
Shifting Into Park
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-34.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-31 for more
information.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pressing the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the key, the vehicle is in
P (Park).
2-32
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if
the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with
the engine running, it could overheat and even
catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not
leave the vehicle with the engine running.
Torque Lock
Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts
too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission.
This happens when parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not done properly and then it
is difficult to shift out of P (Park). To prevent torque lock,
set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park). To find
out how, see ‘‘Shifting Into P (Park)’’ listed previously.
If torque lock does occur, your vehicle may need to be
pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking
pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park).
Shifting Out of Park
The vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake is
firmly set before you leave it. After you have moved the
shift lever into P (Park), hold the regular brake pedal
down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away
from P (Park) without first pressing the button on the
console shift lever. If you can, it means that the shift
lever was not fully locked into P (Park).
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in P (Park) with the shift lever button fully
released, and
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
P (Park), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is applied.
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
2-33
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
See Jump Starting on page 5-36 for more information.
To shift out of P (Park):
Parking Over Things That Burn
{ CAUTION:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
see your dealer/retailer.
2-34
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
{ CAUTION:
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
• The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
CAUTION:
• There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
modifications that are not completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
• Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.
(Continued)
2-35
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{ CAUTION:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For more information,
see Engine Exhaust on page 2-35.
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle
if the automatic transmission shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.
The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when
the engine is running unless you have to. If you
have left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake
and move the shift lever to P (Park).
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park on page 2-32.
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 4-34.
2-36
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
Manual Rearview Mirror
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move
it for a clearer view of behind your vehicle.
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it
for a clearer view of behind your vehicle. Adjust the
mirror to reduce the glare of headlamps from behind
you. Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it
for nighttime use.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three additional control
buttons located at the bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer/retailer for more information on the system and
how to subscribe to OnStar. See OnStar® System on
page 2-39 for more information about the services
OnStar provides.
Adjust the mirror to reduce the glare of headlamps
from behind you. Press AUTO or ( located in the lower
center of the mirror to turn automatic dimming on or off.
The indicator light comes on when this feature is on.
For vehicles with OnStar®, press the O located on the
lower part of the mirror, for up to six seconds to turn
automatic dimming on or off.
Vehicles with OnStar have three additional control
buttons located at the bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer/retailer for more information on the system
and how to subscribe to OnStar. See OnStar® System
on page 2-39 for more information about the services
OnStar provides.
2-37
Outside Power Mirrors
Controls for the outside
power mirrors are located
on the instrument panel.
Outside Convex Mirrors
{ CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things, like other
vehicles, look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror
or glance over your shoulder before changing
lanes.
To adjust the mirrors:
1. Move the selector switch to the left or right to
choose the driver or passenger mirror.
2. Press the corresponding edges of the round control
pad to move each mirror to the desired direction.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the
vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.
2-38
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver’s seat.
OnStar® System
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If the airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic
call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request
emergency services be sent to your location. If the keys
are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
to have a signal sent to unlock the doors. OnStar
Hands-Free Calling, including 30 trial minutes good
for 60 days, is available on most vehicles. OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trial route,
is available on most vehicles. Press the OnStar button
to have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service.
OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
glove box literature.
Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until
the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar. After the
first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a monthly
or annual subscription payment plan. If a payment plan
is not selected, the OnStar system and all services,
including airbag notification and emergency services,
may be deactivated and no longer available. For more
information visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca (Canada),
or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor.
Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.
To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services
described below, or for a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s
Guide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or
onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the
OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours
a day, 7 days a week.
2-39
OnStar Services Available with the
Safe & Sound Plan
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes
good for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be linked
to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a Bell
Mobility service plan in Canada, depending on eligibility.
To find out more, refer to the OnStar Owner’s Guide in
the vehicle’s glove box, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, or
speak with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar
button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes
Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
system can provide voice-guided driving directions.
Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor
locate a business or address and download driving
directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the
desired destination will play through the audio system
speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
Link to Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
OnStar Services Included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-40
OnStar Virtual Advisor
How OnStar Service Works
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and
stock quotes. Press the phone button and give a
few simple voice commands to browse through the
various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for
more information. This feature is only available in
the continental U.S.
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed,
the emergency button is pressed, or if the airbags or
AACN system deploy. This information usually includes
the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle
was involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehicle
was hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle also sends
OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can provide
services where it is located.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-117
for more information.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception when
the service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas,
or at all times.
2-41
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons
is red, the system may not be functioning properly. Press
the OnStar button and request a vehicle diagnostic. If the
light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired and all services have been
deactivated. Press the OnStar button to confirm that
the OnStar equipment is active.
2-42
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open the glove box, pull the handle to the left and
pull the glove box door down until it stops and is
fully open.
Cupholders
Cupholders are located on the lower front of the
center console. Pull-out cupholders are located at
the bottom of the armrest and on the back of the
rear seat center console. Cupholders are also
located on the rear seat armrest.
Center Console Storage
For vehicles with a center console storage area, open
with the lever on the front of the console.
Luggage Carrier
{ CAUTION:
If something is carried on top of the vehicle that
is longer or wider than the luggage carrier — like
paneling, plywood, or a mattress — the wind can
catch it while the vehicle is being driven. This can
cause a driver to lose control. The item being
carried could be violently torn off, and this could
cause a collision, and damage the vehicle. Items
may be carried inside. Never carry something
longer or wider than the luggage carrier on top of
the vehicle.
The roof rack crossrails can be locked in four
positions only.
For vehicles with a luggage carrier, it allows for things
to be loaded on top of the vehicle. The luggage carrier
has side rails attached to the roof, sliding crossrails,
if equipped, and places to use for tying things down.
These allow for some things to be loaded on top of the
vehicle, as long as objects are not wider or longer than
the luggage carrier.
2-43
Press the lever down and align the crossrails on both
sides with the holes on the siderails. Move the crossrail
by hand. There will be a notable click as the pins align
into the holes locking the crossrail into place.
To reposition the crossrail, pull up on the end levers of
the crossrail to the upright position. This releases the pins
from the holes in the siderail and allows for the crossrail
to be moved into a new position.
Make sure the lever is in the down position, and that the
crossrail cannot be moved by hand when it is in place.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 220 lbs (100 kg) or hangs over the
rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your vehicle.
Load cargo so that it rests on the slats as far forward
as possible and against the side rails, making sure to
fasten it securely.
Do not stand on plastic lower body panels when loading
cargo on the luggage carrier.
2-44
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading the vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading the Vehicle on
page 4-21.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo while driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier
crossrails are locked and cargo is still securely fastened.
When the luggage carrier is not in use, lock one
crossrail at the rear most position on the siderails
and lock the other crossrail above the opening of
the rear door to reduce wind noise.
Rear Compartment Storage
Panel/Cover
For vehicles with an adjustable panel/cargo cover
feature, the cover can be adjusted into three positions.
There may also be a flip panel towards the front of
the cargo cover. The panel may have to be moved
upward in order to gain access to the cargo cover.
2-45
The panel can be used in this position if additional
space is needed above the panel. Place the cargo on
top of the panel in this position.
{ CAUTION:
If you were to carry things on the adjustable panel
when it is in the upper (cargo cover) or center
positions, during a sudden vehicle movement or a
crash, those things could be thrown around in the
vehicle. You or others could be injured. When it is
in the upper or center position, always secure any
cargo on the floor beneath the panel/cover.
To use the panel in the lower position, do the following:
1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the
lower guides.
2. Slide the panel forward.
3. Press down on the back of the panel to lock
it in place.
2-46
To use the panel in the center position, do the following:
1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the
middle guides.
2. Slide the panel forward.
3. Press down and pull rearward on the back of the
panel to lock it in place.
The panel can be used in this position when a flat or
spare tire has to be placed in the rear cargo area.
Table
To use the panel in the upper position, do the following:
1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the top
guides.
2. Slide the panel forward.
3. Press down and pull rearward on the back of the
panel to lock it in place.
This can be used as a cargo cover for the rear area.
The panel may be installed either carpet or plastic side
up. The panel may also be used as a table in this
position. See Table on page 2-47 for more information.
Rear Seat Armrest
Vehicles with a rear seat armrest, have two cupholders.
Pull the armrest down from the rear seatback to
access the cupholders.
For vehicles with an adjustable panel/cargo cover, it can
function as a table. The maximum load for the table is
100 lbs. distributed (45 kg).
2-47
To set up the table, do the following:
1. With the adjustable panel in the upper position
pull rearward to position it for use as a table.
The plastic side should be up.
Notice: Placing hot items on the surface of the
table could damage it. Always be sure that the items
that are placed on the surface of the table are of
moderate temperature.
2. Turn the knob to release the leg from the plastic
side of the table and turn the leg outward.
There are four hooks located on the table that can be
used for grocery bags.
3. Set the table leg onto the liftgate lock striker at the
rear edge of the vehicle.
Convenience Net
Make sure to place the table leg securely onto the
liftgate lock striker.
Notice: Driving with the panel extended into the
table position could damage your vehicle. Always
have the panel in the stored position while you
are driving.
2-48
Use the convenience net, located in the rear, to store
small loads as far forward as possible. The net should
not be used to store heavy loads.
Cargo Tie Downs
Four cargo tie-downs are located in the rear
compartment of the vehicle. The tie-downs can
be used to secure small loads.
Sunroof
If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, the controls
to operate it are located on the headliner above the
rearview mirror. The ignition must be in RUN/ON or
ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
must be active, to operate the sunroof. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-21 for more
information.
To express-open the
sunroof glass panel and
sunshade, press the switch
rearward and release it.
To stop the sunroof before it is completely open, press
the switch rearward again. The sunshade cannot be
closed with the sunroof open.
To close the sunroof, press forward and hold the switch
until the sunroof stops, lifts and seals at the back of
the sunroof glass. Press forward on the switch again,
to make sure the sunroof is fully closed.
To put the sunroof in the vent position, pull down on the
front of the switch. Push up on the front of the switch
to close it.
2-49
✍ NOTES
2-50
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-8
Windshield Washer .........................................3-9
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...........................3-10
Cruise Control ..............................................3-10
Headlamps ..................................................3-13
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-13
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-14
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-14
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-15
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-15
Dome Lamp .................................................3-16
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-16
Map Lamps .................................................3-16
Cargo Lamp .................................................3-16
Electric Power Management ...........................3-17
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-17
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-18
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-18
Climate Controls ............................................3-19
Climate Control System .................................3-19
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-23
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-23
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-24
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-25
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-26
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-26
Tachometer .................................................3-26
Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-27
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-28
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-29
Charging System Light ..................................3-30
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-30
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light .....3-31
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ....3-32
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......3-32
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-33
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-33
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-34
Oil Pressure Light (US-Canada) ......................3-36
Change Engine Oil Light ................................3-37
Security Light ...............................................3-37
Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-37
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-38
Reduced Engine Power Light .........................3-38
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-38
Service All-Wheel Drive Light .........................3-39
All-Wheel Drive Disabled Light ........................3-39
Gate Ajar Light .............................................3-40
Door Ajar Light .............................................3-40
Service Vehicle Soon Light ............................3-40
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-40
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-41
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-42
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-42
DIC Compass ..............................................3-47
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-49
DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-57
3-2
Audio System(s) .............................................3-64
Setting the Clock ..........................................3-65
Radio(s) ......................................................3-67
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or
Six-Disc CD Player) ...................................3-86
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and
DVD Player) .............................................3-91
XM Radio Messages .....................................3-96
Navigation/Radio System ...............................3-97
Bluetooth® ...................................................3-97
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System .........3-108
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-117
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-117
Radio Reception .........................................3-118
Multi-Band Antenna .....................................3-119
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Outlet Adjustment on page 3-23.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3-25.
Windshield Wipers on page 3-8.
DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-42.
Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-29.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer on page 3-10.
Fog Lamps on page 3-15.
I. Outside Power Mirrors on page 2-38.
J. Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-15.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
Cruise Control on page 3-10.
Tilt Wheel on page 3-6.
Horn on page 3-6.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-117.
Audio System(s) on page 3-64.
Shift Lever. See Shifting Into Park on page 2-32.
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-7.
Power Windows on page 2-15.
Climate Control System on page 3-19. Heated Seats
on page 1-4 (If Equipped).
T. Glove Box on page 2-42.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
located on the instrument panel, to make the front and
rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble.
Press
| again to turn the flashers off.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
The vehicle has a tilt wheel that lets the steering wheel
be adjusted.
The tilt lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and push
the lever down. Then, move the steering wheel to a
comfortable position and pull the lever up firmly to lock
the column in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal
a turn. When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G:
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
53:
O:
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Exterior Lamp Control
Flash-to-Pass.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
Raise or lower the lever until the indicator arrow on the
instrument panel starts to flash to signal a lane change.
Hold it there until the lane change is completed. The lever
will return by itself when it is released.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers will not see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-97 and for burned-out bulbs.
3-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
To change the headlamps from low beam to high,
push the turn signal lever away from you. To change
from high beam to low beam, pull the turn signal
lever towards you. To flash the high beams from low
beam, pull the turn signal lever all the way towards you.
Then release it.
When the high beams
are on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
will also be on.
The windshield wiper lever is located on the right side of
the steering column.
Move the lever to the following positions:
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
To flash the high beams from low beam, pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever all the way towards you.
Then release it.
3-8
1 (High Speed):
6 (Low Speed):
& (Delay):
For steady wiping at high speed.
For steady wiping at low speed.
Sets a delay between wipes.
6 (Delay Adjustment):
Move the lever to the delay
position to choose a delayed wiping cycle. Turn the
intermittent adjust band down for a longer delay or up
for a shorter delay.
9 (Off):
Turns off the windshield wipers.
8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down to mist
and release for a single wiping cycle. The windshield
wipers stop after one wipe and the lever returns to
its starting position. Hold the lever on mist longer for
more wipes.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If they are frozen to the windshield, gently loosen or
thaw them. If the blades do become damaged, install new
blades or blade inserts. See Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 5-49.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Windshield Washer
{ CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
There is a button marked with the windshield washer
symbol at the end of the windshield wiper lever. Press
this button to spray washer fluid on the windshield.
The wipers will run for a few cycles to clear the window
and then either stop or return to your preset speed.
For more wash cycles, press and hold the button longer.
3-9
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Cruise Control
The rear wiper and rear wash buttons are located on
the instrument panel above the audio system.
Cruise control lets a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more be maintained without keeping your foot on
the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds
below 25 mph (40 km/h).
Z (Rear Wiper):
Press to turn the rear wiper on and
off. When the wiper is on it runs intermittently at a preset
speed.
Y (Wash):
Press to spray washer fluid on the rear
window. The window wiper will also come on. Release
the button when enough fluid has been sprayed on
the window. The rear wiper will run a few more cycles
after it is released. If the rear wiper function was already
on, prior to pressing the wash button, it stays on until
the wiper button is pressed again.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid that is
in the windshield washer reservoir. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-31.
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control
shuts off.
If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction Control
System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control automatically disengages. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-7. When road conditions allow,
the cruise control can be used again.
{ CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot
drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use the
cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
3-10
J (On/Off): Press to turn the cruise control system on
and off. The indicator light is on when cruise control
is on and turns off when cruise control is off.
{ CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into
cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
The cruise control buttons
are located on the steering
wheel.
+RES (Resume): Press to resume a set speed and to
accelerate the speed.
SET− (Set): Press to set a speed and to decrease the
speed.
[ (Cancel):
Press to cancel cruise control without
erasing the set speed from memory.
Setting Cruise Control
This instrument panel cluster light J comes on after
the cruise control has been set to the desired speed.
1. Press the on/off button to turn cruise control on.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET− button and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
3-11
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is at a set speed and the
brakes are applied, this disengages the cruise control.
The instrument panel cluster light J also goes out,
indicating cruise is no longer engaged. To return to
the previously set speed, it does not need to be reset.
Once the vehicle is going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, press +RES. The vehicle goes back to the
previous set speed and stays there.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
• Press and hold the +RES button until the desired
speed is reached, then release it.
• To increase vehicle speed in small amounts, press
the +RES button. Each time this is done, the
vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
3-12
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If the cruise control system is already engaged:
• Press and hold the SET– button until the desired
lower speed is reached, then release it.
• To slow down in small amounts, briefly press SET−.
Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle slows down to the cruise control speed that
was set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon
the vehicle’s speed, load, and the steepness of the hills.
While going up steep hills, you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed. While
going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a lower
gear to keep the vehicle at a lower speed. However,
when the brakes are applied the cruise control turns off.
Ending Cruise Control
The exterior lamp control has the following positions:
There are three ways to end cruise control:
AUTO (Off/Automatic Headlamps): Automatic
mode turns the exterior lamps on and off depending
upon how much light is available outside of the vehicle.
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Press the J button, to turn off the cruise control
system.
• Press the [ button.
When cruise control disengages, the cruise symbol
in the instrument panel cluster goes out.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
Headlamps
The exterior lamp control is located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
O (Exterior Lamp Control):
Turn the control with this
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
; (Parking Lamps):
Turns on the parking lamps
together with the following:
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
5 3 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, together
with the previously listed lamps and lights.
Headlamps on Reminder
If you open the driver’s door with the ignition off and the
lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.
3-13
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) are
required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make the low-beam headlamps
come on at a reduced brightness in daylight when
the following conditions are met:
•
•
•
•
•
The ignition is on.
The exterior lamp band is in the automatic position.
The transmission is not in P (Park).
The light sensor determines it is daytime.
The parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, the low-beam headlamps will be
on at a reduced brightness. The taillamps, sidemarker,
instrument panel lights and other lamps will not be on.
When the exterior lamp band is turned to the headlamp
position, the low-beam headlamps come on. The other
lamps that come on with the headlamps will also
come on.
3-14
When the headlamps are turned off, the regular lamps
will go off, and the low-beam headlamps come on
to the reduced brightness.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, move the shift
lever to P (Park). The DRL will stay off until the
shift lever is moved out of the P (Park) position.
The regular headlamp system should be turned on
when needed.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside and the exterior lamps
control is in the automatic position, the headlamps
come on automatically. See Headlamps on page 3-13.
The vehicle has a light sensor located on top of the
instrument panel. Make sure it is not covered, or
the headlamps will be on when they are not needed.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage or tunnel.
Fog Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
For vehicles with fog lamps, the button is located on the
instrument panel above the radio.
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
Use the fog lamps for better visibility in foggy or misty
conditions.
The parking lamps or low-beam headlamps must be on
to use the fog lamps.
#:
The control for this feature
is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering column.
Press to turn the fog lamps on or off.
The fog lamp button is lit when the lamps are on.
The fog lamps will go off whenever the high-beam
headlamps are turned on. When the high-beam
headlamps are turned off, the fog lamps will come
on again.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
Turn the control up to brighten the lights or down to
dim them.
3-15
Dome Lamp
Map Lamps
For vehicles with a dome lamp, move the lever to
change the setting.
9 (Off):
Turns the lamp off, even when a door is open.
1 (Door): The lamp comes on automatically when a
door is opened.
+ (On):
Turns the dome lamp on.
Entry Lighting
The dome lamp and the cargo lamp inside the vehicle
comes on when any door is opened, if the dome lamp is
in the door position. In addition, these lamps come on
when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) unlock button
is pressed. It stays on for 20 seconds or until a door
is opened. After the door is opened and then closed,
the light remains on for 20 seconds, or until the
key is put in the ignition and turned to the ON/RUN
position.
The vehicle may have lamps located on the headliner
above the rearview mirror. Push on the lens in the lamp
to turn them on and off.
Cargo Lamp
The cargo lamp is located over the rear compartment,
and is controlled by the dome lamp. See Dome Lamp
on page 3-16.
3-16
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)
that estimates the battery’s temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best
performance and extended life of the battery.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage
is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a
voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage
move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem,
an alert will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator (alternator) may not
be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the
power that is needed for very high electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan
at high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans,
trailer loads, and loads plugged into accessory
power outlets.
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands
of some accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message
might be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE,
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. If this
message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-49.
Battery Run-Down Protection
The vehicle has a battery saver feature designed to
protect the vehicle’s battery.
When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition
is turned off, the battery rundown protection system
will automatically turn the lamp off after 20 minutes.
This will avoid draining the battery. This vehicle also
has a retained accessory power feature. If the radio is on,
it will turn off after 10 minutes or if any door on the vehicle
is opened. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 2-21.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
3-17
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The accessory power outlets can be used to connect
electrical equipment, such as a cellular phone.
The two accessory power outlets are located in the front
and at the rear of the center console storage area.
To use the outlets, remove the cover. When not in use,
always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
Notice: If electrical devices are left plugged into
a power outlet, the battery may drain causing the
vehicle not to start or damage to the battery. This
would not be covered by the warranty. Always unplug
all electrical devices when turning off the vehicle.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlets and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience
a problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional
information on the accessory power outlet.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating
of 20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
3-18
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
For vehicles with a removable ashtray and cigarette
lighter, the ashtray can be placed into the front console
cupholders.
To use the lighter, push it in all the way and let go.
When it is ready, it pops back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating
of 15 amperes.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items
are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items
in the ashtray.
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle
can be controlled with this system. For vehicles with the
remote start feature, the climate control system functions
as part of the remote start feature. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5.
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the fan speed. To turn the
fan off, turn the fan knob all the way counterclockwise.
In any setting other than off, the fan runs continuously
with the ignition on. The fan must be turned on to run
the air conditioning compressor. There will be some
airflow noticeable from the various outlets when driving,
even with the fan in the off position. This is so fresh
air is always available in the vehicle. To turn off the
air completely, turn the fan to 9 and select the
recirculation button.
Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside the vehicle.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the direction of the
airflow inside the vehicle.
There is one position between each mode to finely
adjust airflow position.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Fan Control
Outside Air
Temperature Control
Recirculation
Air Delivery Mode
Control
F. Air Conditioning
G. Heated Seats
H. Rear Window
Defogger
Select from the following modes:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel outlets and the floor outlets.
3-19
6 (Floor):
Air is directed to the floor outlets with some
air directed to the windshield.
When this mode is selected, the system turns the
recirculation mode off. Recirculation mode cannot be
selected while in floor mode. This helps to prevent
window fogging.
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, side window
outlets, and floor outlets. In this mode, the system turns
the recirculation mode off and runs the air conditioning
compressor unless the outside air is at or below freezing.
Recirculation mode cannot be selected while in defog
mode. This helps prevent window fogging. To defog the
windows faster, turn the temperature knob clockwise to
the warmest setting.
0 (Defrost):
This mode removes fog or frost from the
windshield more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield,
with some air directed to the side window outlets and
the floor outlets. In this mode, the system turns the
recirculation mode off and runs the air conditioning
compressor unless the outside air is at or below freezing.
Recirculation mode cannot be selected while in defrost
mode. This helps prevent window fogging. To defrost the
windows faster, turn the temperature knob clockwise to
the warmest setting.
For best results, clear all snow and ice from the
windshield before defrosting.
3-20
Air Conditioning
# (Air Conditioning):
Press to turn the air conditioning
system on or off. An indicator light comes on to show
that the air conditioning is on. The air conditioning
can be selected in any mode as long as the fan is
on and the outside temperature is above freezing.
A flashing indicator light indicates that the air
conditioning compressor is currently not available.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days, select the following
settings together:
H mode.
Select ; .
Turn the # on.
1. Select
2.
3.
4. Select the coolest temperature and highest fan
speed.
5. Once the vehicle’s interior temperature is below the
outside temperature, select recirculation mode for
enhanced cooling.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of the vehicle to become
too dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air
inside of the vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation
mode off.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip under the
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
; (Outside Air): Press to turn the outside air mode
on. An indicator light comes on to show that outside
air is on. Air from outside the vehicle will circulate
throughout the vehicle. The outside air mode can
be used with all modes, but it cannot be used with
the recirculation mode. Pressing ; will cancel
the recirculation mode.
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on. An indicator light comes on to show
recirculation is on. The air inside the vehicle will be
recirculated through the climate control system and the
vehicle, not from outside the vehicle. It can be used to
prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle
or to help cool the air inside the vehicle more quickly.
Avoid using the recirculation mode during high periods of
humidity and cool outside temperatures since this may
result in increased window fogging. If window fogging is
experienced, select the defrost mode.
Recirculation mode is not available in floor, defog or
defrost modes and will shut off automatically and change
to outside air. If the button is selected in these modes, the
indicator will flash. This helps prevent window fogging
and moisture building up within the cabin.
3-21
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger only works when the ignition
is in ON/RUN.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
< (Rear Window Defogger):
( (Heated Seats):
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
Press to turn the rear
window defogger on or off. An indicator light comes
on to show that the rear window defogger is on.
The rear window defogger stays on for about
10 minutes if the vehicle remains at slower vehicle
speeds, or until the button is pressed or the ignition is
turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF. If turned
on again, the defogger only runs for about five minutes
before turning off again. At higher vehicle speeds, the
defogger may stay on continuously. The defogger can
also be turned off by turning off the engine.
For vehicles with the remote start feature, the rear
defogger will automatically turn on. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5.
3-22
For vehicles with heated seats, see
Heated Seats on page 1-4.
Remote Start Climate Control Operation
For vehicles with the remote start feature activated, the
climate control system heats and cools the inside of the
vehicle using the modes that were set before the vehicle
was turned off. The rear defogger will also automatically
turn on. If the vehicle has heated seats, they may turn on
if it is cold outside and will shut off when the key is turned
to ON/RUN. See Heated Seats on page 1-4.
Outlet Adjustment
To change the passenger compartment air filter, use the
following steps:
Use the louvers located on the air outlets to change the
direction of the airflow.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the vehicle that may block
the flow of air into the vehicle.
• Do not use any non-GM approved hood deflectors
that could adversely affect the performance of the
system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more
effectively.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Outside air is routed through a passenger compartment
air filter before entering the vehicle. This filter removes
certain particles from the air, including pollen and dust
particles. Reductions in airflow, which may occur more
quickly in dusty areas, indicate that the filter needs to be
replaced early.
The filter should be replaced as part of routine
scheduled maintenance. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for when to replace the filter.
1. The passenger’s side air inlet panel is located
below the center of the passenger’s side wiper
blade. Remove the push pin retaining the air inlet
panel. Pry the center of the push pin out 0.5 in
(13 mm) for removal.
2. Open the hood.
3. Remove the three push pins from the top and
forward edge of the passenger’s side air inlet panel.
4. Remove the air inlet panel to access the filter.
3-23
5. Press the release tab on the driver’s side of the
filter and pull out the edge of the filter.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention
to the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is
a problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to indicate a problem with
the vehicle.
6. Remove the filter from the vehicle.
7. Install a new passenger compartment air filter.
For the type of filter to use see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 6-15.
8. Reverse Steps 1 through 5.
3-24
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there may
be a problem, check the section that explains what to do.
Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly and even dangerous.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know
how fast you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will need to drive safely and
economically.
United States version shown, Canada and Sport Model similar
3-25
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your trip odometer is located in the Driver Information
Center and shows how far your vehicle has been driven
since the trip odometer was last reset. For more
information see DIC Operation and Displays on
page 3-42.
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer.
The digital odometer will read 999,999 if someone
tries to turn it back.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to
the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be.
If not, then it is set at zero and a label must be put
on the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading
when the new odometer was installed.
3-26
Tachometer
The tachometer shows your engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Notice: If the engine is operated with the
tachometer in the solid red area, the vehicle
could be damaged. The damages would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not operate
the engine in the solid red area.
Safety Belt Reminders
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Several seconds after the engine is started,
a chime sounds for several seconds to remind
the front passenger to buckle their safety belt.
This only occurs if the passenger airbag is enabled.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-63 for more
information. The passenger safety belt light, located
on the instrument panel, comes on and stays on for
several seconds and then flashes for several more.
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for
several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety
belt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light
comes on and stays on
for several seconds, then
flashes for several more.
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver safety
belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light
comes on.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt warning light and
chime may turn on if an object is put on the seat such
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.
3-27
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag sensor,
the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiring and
the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more
information on the airbag system, see Airbag System
on page 1-55.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start
the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
3-28
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you start the engine. If the light does
not come on then, have it fixed immediately. If there
is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag Driver
Information Center (DIC) message may also come on.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-49 for
more information.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
The vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-63 for
important safety information. The instrument panel
has a passenger airbag status indicator.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
{ CAUTION:
United States
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and
off, for several seconds as a system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status indicator will light either
ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to let you know
the status of the right front passenger frontal airbag.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-28
for more information, including important safety
information.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
3-29
Charging System Light
If this light comes on while
you are driving, you may
have a problem with
the charging system.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the brake system warning light comes on, there is a
brake problem. Have your brake system inspected
right away.
A charging system Driver Information Center (DIC)
message may also appear. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-49 for more information.
This light could indicate that you have problems with
a generator drive belt, or another electrical problem.
Have it checked right away. If you must drive a
short distance with the light on, be certain to turn off all
your accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.
United States
Canada
The brake light is located in the instrument panel
cluster.
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is
a problem.
3-30
When the ignition is on, the brake light will come on
when you set your parking brake. The light will stay on if
your parking brake does not release fully. A chime will
also sound if the parking brake is not fully released and
the vehicle is moving. If it stays on after your parking
brake is fully released, it means you have a brake
problem.
The brake light will also come on to indicate a low
brake fluid level. See Brakes on page 5-32 for more
information.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal
is harder to push or the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-27.
{ CAUTION:
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with
the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this light
comes on briefly when
the engine is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the
light comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or
comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the
vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle
does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with
the regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-30.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-49 for
all brake related DIC messages.
3-31
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
Your vehicle has a
Traction Control System
(TCS) and StabiliTrak®
warning light.
When the traction control is activated the light will
flash when the TCS is limiting wheel spin or when the
StabiliTrak® system is active. You may feel or hear
the system working, but this is normal. This light may
also come on after extended heavy braking indicating
the brakes have become too hot to limit wheel spin.
This light will come on and stay on if the TCS is turned
off using the traction control on/off button, located
next to the gear shift lever.
If the TCS warning light comes on and stays on for an
extended period of time when the system is turned
on, your vehicle needs service. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-7 and StabiliTrak® System on
page 4-6 for more information.
3-32
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
The engine coolant
temperature warning light
will come on when the
engine has overheated.
If this happens you should pull over and turn off the
engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-28 for more information.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause the vehicle to overheat.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-28. The vehicle’s
engine could be damaged, and it might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive with
the engine coolant temperature warning light on.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage measures
the temperature of the
vehicle’s engine.
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire
pressure monitoring
system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine
is started.
It provides information about tire pressures and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
When the Light is On Steady
If the indicator needle moves into the shaded area,
the engine is too hot. A temperature indicator light will
turn on.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, and the temperature indicator
light comes on, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly
underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-49 for more
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as
it is safe to do so. If a tire is underinflated, inflate
to the proper pressure. See Tires on page 5-51 for
more information.
3-33
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
This indicates that there could be a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about
a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition
cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-61
for more information.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle.
This system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a
cleaner environment.
This light should come on
when the ignition is on, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
3-34
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with
this light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of the vehicle or the replacement of the original
tires with other than those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s
emission controls and can cause this light to come
on. Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
This could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on page 5-3.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Reduce vehicle speed.
Avoid hard accelerations.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being
hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon
as possible.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
• Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling
the Tank on page 5-8. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle
of water, the vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.
The condition is usually corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the
light off.
• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor
fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently
as designed and can cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear,
misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on
acceleration. These conditions might go away once
the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of
the proper fuel to turn the light off.
See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
3-35
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Oil Pressure Light (US-Canada)
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on with the engine running, or if the
key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection.
This can happen if the battery has recently been
replaced or if the battery has run down. The
diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during normal driving.
This can take several days of routine driving. If this
has been done and the vehicle still does not pass the
inspection for lack of OBD II system readiness, your
dealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
3-36
{ CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
light then goes off.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-17, and
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation on
page 2-18.
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil
is not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might have some other system
problem.
Change Engine Oil Light
Fog Lamp Light
The fog lamp light comes
on when the fog lamps are
in use.
If this light comes on and stays on for 30 seconds,
it means that service is required for your vehicle.
A CHANGE OIL SOON message will appear on the
DIC. For more information see DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-49.
The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 3-15 for more information.
After having the oil changed you will need to reset the
light. See Engine Oil on page 5-15, and Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information.
3-37
Cruise Control Light
The cruise control light
comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more information.
Reduced Engine Power Light
Your vehicle has a
reduced engine power
light.
and turn off the ignition. Wait for 10 seconds and
restart your vehicle. This may correct the condition.
See Service Vehicle Soon Light on page 3-40
for more information.
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed when
the reduced engine power light is on, but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. The performance may
be reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle.
If this light stays on, see your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible for diagnosis and repair.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8
for more information.
This light, along with the service vehicle soon light,
will be displayed when a noticeable reduction in
the vehicle’s performance may occur. Stop the vehicle
3-38
Service All-Wheel Drive Light
This light is located in the
center of your instrument
panel cluster.
This light and the SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) will
come on and stay on to indicate that there may be a
problem with the drive system and service is required.
See All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System on page 4-9
and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-49 for
more information.
All-Wheel Drive Disabled Light
This light will come on
when the rear drive system
is overheating.
An ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF message will appear in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) too. This light will turn off
when the rear drive system cools down. If this light stays
on for a while, you need to reset the light. To reset the
light, turn the ignition off and then back on again. If the
light stays on, see your dealer/retailer right away.
See All-Wheel Drive on page 5-41 and DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-49 for more information.
3-39
Gate Ajar Light
Service Vehicle Soon Light
If this light comes on, your
liftgate is not completely
closed. Driving with the
liftgate open can cause
carbon monoxide (CO)
to enter the vehicle.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-35 for more information.
Door Ajar Light
This light, comes on if
a condition exists that
requires the vehicle to
be taken in for service.
If the light comes on, see your dealer/retailer for service
as soon as possible.
Fuel Gage
This light will come on
when a door is open.
Before driving, check
that all doors are properly
closed.
When the ignition is on,
the fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have left in your tank.
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
3-40
When the indicator nears empty, the low fuel light
will come on. You still have a little fuel left, but you
should get more soon. See Low Fuel Warning Light
on page 3-41 for more information.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
Low Fuel Warning Light
This light is located in
the fuel gage. For more
information see Fuel Gage
on page 3-40.
• At the service station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took
a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity
to fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
• The gage takes a few seconds to stabilize after the
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
When you add fuel the light should go off. If it does not,
have your vehicle serviced.
A “Fuel Level LOW” message also appears in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See Fuel Gage on page 3-40
for more information.
ignition is turned on, and will go back to empty
when you turn the ignition off.
For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-103.
3-41
Driver Information Center (DIC)
DIC Operation and Displays
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
All messages will appear in the DIC display located
in the center of the instrument panel cluster. The DIC
buttons are located on the center of the instrument panel.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine was turned off.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system problem
is detected. The top of the DIC display shows the shift
lever position indicator. See Automatic Transmission
Operation (3.4L V6 with 5-Speed) on page 2-24 or
Automatic Transmission Operation (3.6L V6 with
6-Speed) on page 2-27 for more information.
If your vehicle has these feature, the DIC also displays
the compass direction and the outside air temperature
when viewing the trip and fuel information. If there is a
problem with the system that controls the temperature
display, the numbers will be replaced with dashes. If this
occurs, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an
extended period of time, consult your dealer/retailer.
Under certain circumstances, especially when the engine
is idling, a delay updating the temperature display is
normal.
The DIC also allows some features to be personalized.
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-57 for
more information.
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the DIC buttons located on the center
of the instrument panel.
3-42
DIC Buttons
The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicle information, and
set/reset buttons. The button functions are detailed
in the following pages.
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through
the trip and fuel displays. See “Trip/Fuel Menu Items”
following for more information on these displays.
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to
scroll through the vehicle information displays and
to personalize the feature settings on your vehicle.
See “Vehicle Information Menu Items” following and
DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-57 for more
information on these displays.
V (Set/Reset):
Press this button to set or reset certain
functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages
on the DIC.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel):
Press this button to scroll through the
following displays:
ODOMETER
Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER displays.
This display shows the distance the vehicle has been
driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). This display
will also show the outside air temperature in either
degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
To change the DIC display to English or metric units,
see “UNITS” later in this section.
TRIP
Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP displays.
This display shows the current distance traveled in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset
for the trip odometer. This display will also show the
outside air temperature in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
or degrees Celsius (°C).
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the
set/reset button while the trip odometer is displayed.
AVG (Average) SPD (Speed)
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG (Average) SPD
(Speed) displays. This display shows the average speed
of the vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per
hour (km/h). This average is calculated based on the
various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of
this value. To reset the value, press and hold the set/
reset button. The display will return to zero.
AVG (Average) ECON (Economy)
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG (Average)
ECON (Economy) displays. This display shows the
approximate average miles per gallon (mpg) or liters
per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number is calculated
based on the number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded
since the last time this menu item was reset. To reset
this display, press and hold the set/reset button.
The display will return to zero.
3-43
RANGE
Vehicle Information Menu Items
Press the trip/fuel button until RANGE displays.
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle
can be driven without refueling.
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to scroll
through the following displays:
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of
the vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
This estimate will change if driving conditions change.
For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent
stops, this display may read one number, but if
the vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number may
change even though the same amount of fuel is in the
fuel tank. This is because different driving conditions
produce different fuel economies. Generally, freeway
driving produces better fuel economy than city driving.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message will be displayed. See “FUEL LEVEL LOW”
under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-49
for more information.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
3-44
OIL LIFE
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate
of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains. The engine oil life system will alert
you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your
driving conditions.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display
along with the Change Engine Oil Light on the instrument
panel cluster. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-49 and Change
Engine Oil Light on page 3-37. You should change the
oil as soon as possible. See Engine Oil on page 5-15.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself
after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be
careful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any
time other than when the oil has just been changed.
It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change.
To reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil
Life System on page 5-18.
UNITS
Press the vehicle information button until UNITS
displays. This display allows you to select between
English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button to select between
ENGLISH or METRIC units.
FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES
The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC.
The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press
the vehicle information button until the DIC displays
FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LF ## RF ##. Press the
vehicle information button again until the DIC displays
REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LR ## RR ##.
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by
the system while driving, a message advising you
to check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in
the display. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58
and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-49 for
more information.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of
a value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for service.
BATTERY
Press the vehicle information button until BATTERY
displays. This display shows the current battery voltage.
If the voltage is normal, the display will show NORMAL.
If the voltage is low or high, the display will show LOW or
HIGH. Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage
based on the state of the battery. The battery voltage
may fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC.
This is normal. See Charging System Light on page 3-30
for more information.
If there is a problem with the battery charging system,
the DIC will display SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM. See “SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM” under DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-49. Also, see Electric Power Management
on page 3-17 for more information.
3-45
LEARN REMOTE KEY
CALIBRATE COMPAS (Compass)
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match
an RKE transmitter to your vehicle:
Your vehicle may have this feature. The compass can
be manually calibrated. To calibrate the compass
through the DIC, see DIC Compass on page 3-47.
1. Make sure the vehicle is in P (Park).
CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
2. Press the vehicle information button until LEARN
REMOTE KEY PRESS V TO BEGIN displays.
Your vehicle may have this feature. To change the
compass zone through the DIC, see DIC Compass
on page 3-47.
3. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
4. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on
the first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is
matched.
5. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
6. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
3-46
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
FEATURE SETTNGS (Settings):
PRESS V TO SELCT (Select)
This display allows you to personalize the feature
settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-57 for more information.
DIC Compass
Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
Compass Zone
The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.
Your dealer/retailer will set the correct zone for your
location.
Under certain circumstances, such as during a long
distance cross-country trip or moving to a new state
or province, it will be necessary to compensate for
compass variance by resetting the zone through the
DIC if the zone is not set correctly.
Compass variance is the difference between the earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the compass
is not set to the zone where you live, the compass may
give false readings. The compass must be set to the
variance zone in which the vehicle is traveling.
To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:
Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure
1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is
moving. Only set it when the vehicle is in P (Park).
Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays.
2. Find the vehicle’s current location and variance
zone number on the map.
Zones 1 through 15 are available.
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and
select the appropriate variance zone.
4. Press the trip/fuel button until the vehicle heading,
for example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC.
5. If calibration is necessary, calibrate the compass.
See “Compass Calibration Procedure” following.
3-47
Compass Calibration
To calibrate the compass, use the following procedure:
The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate
the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location,
such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle
in circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate
away from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers,
or other industrial structures, if possible.
Compass Calibration Procedure
If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display, the
compass should be calibrated.
If the DIC display does not show a heading, for
example, N for North, or the heading does not change
after making turns, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may be
caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna mount,
a magnetic emergency light, magnetic note pad holder,
or any other magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, move the
magnetic item, then turn on the vehicle and calibrate the
compass.
3-48
1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure the
compass zone is set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is located. See “Compass
Variance (Zone) Procedure” earlier in this section.
Do not operate any switches such as window,
sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. during
the calibration procedure.
2. Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO CALIBRATE COMPAS (Compass)
displays.
3. Press the set/reset button to start the compass
calibration.
4. The DIC will display CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in tight circles at less
than 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the calibration.
The DIC will display CALIBRATION COMPLETE for
a few seconds when the calibration is complete. The
DIC display will then return to the previous menu.
DIC Warnings and Messages
ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct
the condition. Multiple messages may appear one
after another.
If your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system,
this message displays along with the All-Wheel Drive
Disabled light when the rear drive system is overheating.
This message turns off when the rear drive system cools
down. If the warning message stays on for a while, you
need to reset the warning message. To reset the warning
message, turn the ignition off and then back on again.
If the message stays on, see your dealer/retailer right
away. See All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System on page 4-9
and All-Wheel Drive Disabled Light on page 3-39 for
more information.
Some messages may not require immediate action,
but you can press the set/reset button to acknowledge
that you received the messages and to clear them
from the display. Pressing any of the DIC buttons
also acknowledge and clear any messages.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be cleared. You should
take any messages that appear on the display seriously
and remember that clearing the messages will only
make the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when the charging system
detects that the battery is being drained. You may notice
that the vehicle attempts to reduce the drain for you
by turning off accessories, such as interior fans, rear
defogger, and heated seats. Turn off all accessories.
If the vehicle is not running, start and run the engine
for at least 10 minutes to allow the battery to recharge.
If the engine is running and the condition persists, see
your dealer/retailer. See Electric Power Management
on page 3-17 for more information.
3-49
CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN CIRCLES
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
This message displays when calibrating the compass.
Drive the vehicle in circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h)
to complete the calibration. See DIC Compass on
page 3-47 for more information.
This message displays when the pressure in one
or more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.
This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRNT
(Front), LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which
tire needs to be checked. You can receive more than
one tire pressure message at a time. To read the other
messages that may have been sent at the same time,
press the set/reset button. If a tire pressure message
appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the
tire pressures checked and set to those shown on the
Tire Loading Information label. See Tires on page 5-51,
Loading the Vehicle on page 4-21, and Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-58. The DIC also shows the tire
pressure values. See DIC Operation and Displays on
page 3-42. If the tire pressure is low, the low tire pressure
warning light comes on. See Tire Pressure Light on
page 3-33.
CALIBRATION COMPLETE
This message displays when the compass calibration is
complete. See DIC Compass on page 3-47 for more
information.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays and the Change Engine Oil Light
in the instrument panel cluster turns on when service
is required for the vehicle. See your dealer/retailer.
See Change Engine Oil Light on page 3-37, Engine
Oil on page 5-15 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4 for more information.
Acknowledging this message will not reset the OIL LIFE
REMAINING display. That must be done at the OIL LIFE
screen under the vehicle information menu. See “OIL
LIFE” under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-42
and Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18 for more
information.
3-50
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This message displays when the driver door is not
closed properly. Close the door completely.
ENGINE HOT A/C
(Air Conditioning) OFF
ENGINE OVRHEATD (Overheated)
STOP ENGINE
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor is automatically turned off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal,
the A/C operation automatically resumes. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 5-28
for more information.
ENGINE OVERHEATD (Overheated)
IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an
overheat warning appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-28 for more information.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle
to idle until it cools down.
This message displays along with a continuous chime
when the engine has overheated. Stop and turn the
engine off immediately to avoid severe engine damage.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-28.
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect
the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on,
but there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may be reduced the next
time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a
reduced speed while this message is on, but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays
on, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer/retailer for
service as soon as possible.
3-51
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays and the Low Fuel Warning Light
in the instrument panel cluster comes on when your
vehicle is low on fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as
possible. See Fuel Gage on page 3-40, Low Fuel
Warning Light on page 3-41, and Filling the Tank
on page 5-8 for more information.
HOOD OPEN
This message displays on some vehicles when the
hood is not closed properly. Close the hood completely.
See Hood Release on page 5-11.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
This message displays when the outside air temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
LIFTGATE OPEN
This message displays when the liftgate is not closed
completely. Close the liftgate completely. See Liftgate
on page 2-12.
3-52
OIL PRSSURE (Pressure) LOW STOP
ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may occur.
If a low oil pressure warning appears on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of
the low oil pressure is corrected. See Engine Oil on
page 5-15 for more information.
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine oil
pressure is low. The oil pressure light also appears on
the instrument panel cluster. See Oil Pressure Light
(US-Canada) on page 3-36.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can
result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure.
Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as
soon as possible when this message is displayed.
PASSENGER DOOR FRONT/
REAR OPEN
This message displays when one or more of the
passenger doors are not closed properly. Close the
doors completely.
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.
See “LEARN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Operation
and Displays on page 3-42 for more information.
SERVICE A/C (Air Conditioning)
SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem
detected in the air conditioning system. Have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays when there is a problem with
the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 3-28 for more information.
SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
If your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
system, this message displays along with the service
all-wheel drive light if a problem occurs with this system.
See Service All-Wheel Drive Light on page 3-39. If this
message appears, stop as soon as possible and turn
off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the
message on the DIC display. If the message is still
displayed or appears again when you begin driving, the
AWD system needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem with
the generator and battery charging systems. Driving with
this problem could drain the vehicle’s battery. Turn off all
unnecessary accessories. Stop and turn off the vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. Have the electrical system
checked by your dealer/retailer immediately.
Connecting a battery charger to your vehicle while the
ignition is in any position other than LOCK/OFF may
cause this message to appear. If you need to charge
your vehicle, make sure that the key is in LOCK/OFF
or out of the ignition during charging.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays and a chime sounds when the
brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning
light also appears on the instrument panel cluster when
this message appears on the DIC. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 3-30. Have the brake system
serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
3-53
SERVICE POWER STEERING
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
On some vehicles, this message displays when a
problem is detected with the power steering system.
When this message is displayed, you may notice
that the effort required to steer the vehicle increases
or feels heavier, but you will still be able to steer
the vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
This message displays when there is a problem with
the theft-deterrent system. A fault has been detected in
the system which means that the system is disabled
and it is not protecting the vehicle. The vehicle usually
restarts; however, you may want to take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer before turning off the engine.
See PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer Operation
on page 2-18 for more information.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
This message displays if there has been a problem
detected with the StabiliTrak® System. A warning
light also appears on the instrument panel cluster.
See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light
on page 3-32. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6
for more information.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull
off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.
Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off and
then back on. If this message still stays on or turns back
on again while you are driving, your vehicle needs
service. Have the StabiliTrak® System inspected by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
3-54
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on
page 3-33. Several conditions may cause this message
to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 5-62 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
STABILITRAK OFF
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is not functioning properly. A warning
light also appears on the instrument panel cluster.
See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light
on page 3-32 and Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-7 for more information. Have the TCS serviced
by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
This message displays any time the StabiliTrak®
System turns off. When this message has been
displayed, StabiliTrak® is no longer available to assist
you with directional control of the vehicle. Adjust
your driving accordingly. See StabiliTrak® System
on page 4-6.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
STABILITRAK NOT READY
This message may display and a warning light on the
instrument panel cluster may be on after first driving the
vehicle and exceeding 30 mph (48 km/h) for 30 seconds.
See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light on
page 3-32. The StabiliTrak® System is not functional
until the light has turned off. See StabiliTrak® System
on page 4-6 for more information.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN.
Any of the following conditions may cause the
StabiliTrak® System to turn off:
• The StabiliTrak® System is turned off by
pressing and holding the traction control button.
See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6 for more
information.
• The battery is low.
• There is a StabiliTrak® System failure. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
3-55
STARTING DISABLD (Disabled)
SERVICE THRTTLE (Throttle)
This message displays if the starting of the engine is
disabled due to the electronic throttle control system.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer
immediately.
This message only appears while the ignition is in
ON/RUN, and will not disappear until the problem is
resolved.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This message displays if the content theft-deterrent
system has detected a break-in attempt while you were
away from your vehicle. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-17 for more information.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) turns off. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 4-7 for more information.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
ON/RUN and disappears after 10 seconds, unless it
is acknowledged or an urgent warning appears.
Any of the following conditions may cause the TCS to
turn off:
• The TCS is turned off by pressing the traction
control button. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-7 for more information.
• The battery is low.
• There is a TCS failure. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
TRACTION CONTROL ON
This message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) is re-learning the tire positions on your
vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned after
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor.
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-66,
Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-61, and
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58 for more
information.
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) turns on. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 4-7 for more information.
3-56
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays as a reminder to turn off the
turn signal if you drive your vehicle for more than
about 0.75 mile (1.2 km) with a turn signal on.
See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
This message displays and a chime sounds only
when the ignition is in ON/RUN. The message will not
disappear until the turn signal is manually turned off,
or a turn is completed.
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to one preferred setting.
All of the personalization options may not be available
on your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
The default settings for the personalization features
were set when your vehicle left the factory, but may
have been changed from their default state since then.
The personalization preferences are automatically
recalled.
To change personalization preferences, use the
following procedure.
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
P (Park).
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the vehicle information button until FEATURE
SETTNGS (Settings): PRESS V TO SELCT (Select)
appears on the DIC display.
3. Press the set/reset button to enter the feature
settings menu.
If the menu is not available, FEATURE SETTNGS
(Settings): AVAILABLE IN PRK (Park) will display.
Before entering the menu, make sure the vehicle is
in P (Park).
Feature Settings Menu Items
The following are personalization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
DISPLAY ENGLISH
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear to
English.
Press the vehicle information button until the
PRESS V TO DISPLAY ENGLISH screen appears
on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to
display all DIC messages in English.
3-57
DISPLAY LANG. (Language)
AUTO LOCK
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-11 for more
information.
Press the vehicle information button until DISPLAY
LANG. (Language) appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the vehicle information button to scroll
through the following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
FRENCH: All messages will appear in French.
SPANISH: All messages will appear in Spanish.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
Press the vehicle information button until AUTO LOCK
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to access the settings for this feature. Then press the
vehicle information button to scroll through the following
settings:
OUT OF PARK (default): The vehicle’s doors
automatically lock when the doors are closed and
the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
AT SPEED: The vehicle’s doors automatically lock
when the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h)
for three seconds.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-58
AUTO UNLOCK
REMOTE LOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not to
turn off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also
allows you to select which doors and when the doors
will automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic
Door Locks on page 2-11 for more information.
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if any of the doors are open. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5
for more information.
Press the vehicle information button until REMOTE
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the vehicle information button to scroll through the
following settings:
DRIVER KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will unlock
when the key is taken out of the ignition.
HORN/LIGHTS OFF: There will be no feedback when
you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
Press the vehicle information button until AUTO
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the vehicle information button to scroll
through the following settings:
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when
the key is taken out of the ignition.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
HORN CHIRP ONLY: The horn will sound on the
second press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
HORN/LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps
will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock button
is pressed again within five seconds of the previous
command.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
3-59
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the
RKE transmitter. You will not receive feedback when
unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if
the doors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2-5 for more information.
Press the vehicle information button until REMOTE
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the vehicle information button to scroll
through the following settings:
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-60
DELAY LOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
locking of the vehicle’s doors and liftgate will be delayed.
When locking the doors and liftgate with the power door
lock switch and a door or the liftgate is open, this feature
will delay locking the doors and liftgate until five seconds
after the last door is closed. You will hear three chimes
to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use. The
key must be out of the ignition for this feature to work.
You can temporarily override delayed locking by pressing
the power door lock switch twice or the lock button on
the RKE transmitter twice. See Delayed Locking on
page 2-10 for more information.
Press the vehicle information button until DELAY LOCK
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to access the settings for this feature. Then press the
vehicle information button to scroll through the following
settings:
LOCK DELAY OFF: There will be no delayed locking
of the vehicle’s doors.
LOCK DELAY ON (default): The doors will not lock
until five seconds after the last door or the liftgate
is closed.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
EXIT LIGHTNG (Lighting)
APPRCH (Approach) LIGHTNG (Lighting)
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
This feature allows you to select whether or not to
have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light
periods after unlocking the vehicle using the RKE
transmitter.
Press the vehicle information button until EXIT
LIGHTNG (Lighting) appears on the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the vehicle information button
to scroll through the following settings:
Press the vehicle information button until APPRCH
(Approach) LIGHTNG (Lighting) appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset button to access
the settings for this feature. Then press the vehicle
information button to scroll through the following
settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 30 seconds.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle is
no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2-5 for more information.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-61
CHIME VOLUME
REMOTE START
This feature allows you to select the volume level of the
chime.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the
remote start off or on. The remote start feature allows
you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using
the RKE transmitter. See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2-7 for more information.
Press the vehicle information button until CHIME
VOLUME appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the vehicle information button to scroll
through the following settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal
level.
Press the vehicle information button until REMOTE
START appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the vehicle information button to scroll through the
following settings:
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-62
FACTORY SETTNGS (Settings)
This feature allows you to set all of the personalization
features back to their factory default settings.
FEATURE SETTNGS (Settings):
PRESS V TO EXIT
This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu.
Press the vehicle information button until FACTORY
SETTNGS (Settings) appears on the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the vehicle information button
to scroll through the following settings:
Press the vehicle information button until FEATURE
SETTNGS (Settings): PRESS V TO EXIT appears
in the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to exit
the menu.
RESTORE ALL (default): The personalization features
will be set to their factory default settings.
If you do not exit, pressing the vehicle information
button again will return you to the beginning of the
vehicle information menu.
DO NOT RESTORE: The personalization features will
not be set to their factory default settings.
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
•
•
•
•
The vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
The trip/fuel DIC button is pressed.
The end of the feature settings menu is reached
and exited.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
3-63
Audio System(s)
For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 4-2.
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
{ CAUTION:
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
• Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
3-64
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
With RAP, the audio system can be played even after
the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 2-21 for more information.
Setting the Clock
AM/FM Base Radio with a Single CD
Player
If the vehicle has a AM/FM Base Radio with a Single
CD Player, it has a H button for setting the time.
To adjust the time:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the H button until the hour begins flashing
on the display. Press H a second time and the
minutes begin flashing on the display.
3. While either the hour or the minutes are flashing,
do one of the following to increase or decrease
the time:
• Press ¨SEEK or ©SEEK.
• Press \ FWD or s REV.
• Turn f clockwise or counter-clockwise.
4. Press H again until the clock display stops flashing
to set the currently displayed time; otherwise, the
flashing stops after five seconds and the current
time displayed is automatically set.
MP3 Radios with a Single CD or a
Single CD and DVD Player
If the vehicle has a radio with a single CD or a CD
and DVD player, it has a H button for setting the time
and date.
To adjust the time and date:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press G to display HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,
minute, month, day, and year).
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
tabs to be changed.
4. To increase the time or date, do one of the
following:
•
•
•
•
Press the pushbutton below the selected tab.
¨SEEK.
Press \ FWD.
Turn f clockwise.
Press
5. To decrease the time or date, do one of the
following:
• Press ©SEEK.
• Press s REV.
• Turn f counter-clockwise.
3-65
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
1. Press G and then the pushbutton located under the
forward arrow tab that displays on the radio screen
until the time 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the
date MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM (day and
month) displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired tab.
3. Press G again to apply the selected default,
or let the screen time out.
MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD Player
If the vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD player, the
radio has a MENU button to set the time and date.
To set the time and date:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN, then press O , to turn the radio on.
2. Press MENU.
3. Press the pushbutton below the
MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.
H tab. The HR,
4. Press the pushbutton below any one of the tabs
you want to change.
3-66
5. To increase the time or date do one of the following:
• Press the pushbutton located below the
selected tab.
• Press ¨SEEK, or \ FWD.
• Turn f clockwise.
6. To decrease the time or date do one of the
following:
• Press ©SEEK or s REV.
• Turn f counterclockwise.
The date does not automatically display. To see the
date press MENU and then softkey below the H tab while
the radio is on. The date with display times out after a
few seconds and goes back to the normal radio and
time display.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
1. Press MENU, and then the pushbutton below
the H tab. The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.
2. Press the pushbutton below the forward arrow tab.
The time 12H and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY
(month, day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day,
month, and year) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located below the desired
option.
4. Press MENU again to apply the selected default, or
let the screen time out.
Radio(s)
Radio with CD and DVD (MP3)
Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Base Radio with CD
and Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3) similar
The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio
system.
If the vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-108 for
more information on the vehicle’s RSE system.
The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate.
The player can read the DTS programmed DVD
Audio or DVD Video media (DTS and DTS 2.0 are
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc.).
Dolby is manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
3-67
Radio Data System (RDS)
The vehicle’s audio system may have Radio Data
System (RDS). The RDS feature is available for use
only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and only works when the information
is available. While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS
station, the station name or call letters appear on the
display. In rare cases, a radio station may broadcast
incorrect information that causes the radio features to
work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume):
Press to turn the system on and off.
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume.
3-68
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The vehicle’s
audio system may also have Speed Compensated
Volume (SCV). While SCV is on, the radio volume
automatically adjusts to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows down.
That way, the volume level should sound about
the same while driving. To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
(automatic volume) tab on the radio display.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM
(if equipped). The selection displays.
f (Tune):
Turn to select radio stations.
©SEEK ¨: Press the arrows to go to the previous or
to the next station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for a
few seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to
a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
4 (Information) (Base Radio with CD):
Press to switch
the display between the radio station frequency and the
time. When the ignition is off, press to display the time.
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,
MP3/WMA, and RDS Features): Press to display
additional text information related to the current FM-RDS
or XM station, or MP3/WMA song. A choice of additional
information such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT
(category) can appear. Continue pressing to highlight the
desired tab, or press the pushbutton positioned under
any one of the tabs and the information about that tab
displays.
When information is not available, No Info displays.
Setting Preset Stations
If the radio does not have XM™, up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM) can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing
the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for three seconds until a beep sounds.
When that pushbutton is pressed and released,
the station that was set, returns.
5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for each pushbutton.
3-69
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to favorite
stations using the presets, favorites button, and steering
wheel controls, if the vehicle has them. See Defensive
Driving on page 4-2.
If the radio has XM, a maximum of 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons
positioned below the radio station frequency tabs and
by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button).
FAV (Favorites): Press the FAV button to go through
up to six pages of favorites, each having six favorite
stations available per page. Each page of favorites can
contain any combination of AM, FM, or XM (if equipped)
stations. To store a station as a favorite, perform the
following steps:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where the
station is to be stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed
and released, the station that was set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
to be stored as a favorite.
3-70
The number of favorites pages can be setup using
the MENU button. To setup the number of favorites
pages, perform the following steps:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 tab.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
by pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out,
to return to the original main radio screen showing
the radio station frequency tabs and to begin
the process of programming favorites for the
chosen amount of numbered pages.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
(Base Radio with CD)
EQ (Equalization): To adjust the bass or treble,
press the f knob or EQ button until the desired tone
control tab displays. Turn the f knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the setting.
The display shows the current bass or treble level.
If a station’s frequency is weak, or if there is static,
decrease the treble.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the f knob
until the tone control tabs display. Continue pressing
to highlight the desired tab, or press the pushbutton
positioned under the desired tab. Turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
setting. The highlighted setting can also be adjusted
by pressing the SEEK arrows, \ FWD (forward)
or s REV (reverse) button until the desired levels
are obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak, or if
there is static, decrease the treble.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BASS, MID, or TREB tab for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to
the middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
EQ (Equalization): Press to select preset equalization
settings.
To return to the manual mode, press the EQ button until
Manual displays or starts to manually adjust the bass,
midrange, or treble by pressing the f knob.
EQ (Equalization) (Radio with CD and DVD): Press
to choose bass and treble equalization settings designed
for different types of music. The choices are pop, rock,
country, talk, jazz, and classical. Selecting MANUAL or
changing bass or treble, returns the EQ to the manual
bass and treble settings.
Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.
If the radio has a Bose® audio system, the EQ settings
are either MANUAL or TALK.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
(Base Radio with CD)
` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
or fade, press the ` button or the f knob until the
desired speaker control tab displays. Turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the setting.
3-71
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or fade,
press the f knob until the speaker control tabs display.
Continue pressing to highlight the desired tab, or press
the pushbutton positioned under the desired tab. Turn
the f knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the
highlighted setting. The highlighted setting can also
be adjusted by pressing the SEEK arrows, \ FWD,
or s REV button until the desired levels are obtained.
If the radio has XM, the CAT button can be used to find
XM stations when the radio is in the XM mode.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or FADE
tab for more than two seconds. A beep sounds and the
level adjusts to the middle position.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
CAT (Category): To find XM channels within a desired
category, perform the following:
1. Press the BAND button until the XM frequency
is displayed. Press the CAT button to display the
category tabs on the radio display. Continue pressing
the CAT button until the desired category name
displays.
• Depending on the radio, another way to navigate
the category list is to press the s REV button or
the \ FWD button.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired
category tab to immediately tune to the first XM
station associated with that category.
3. Turn the f knob, press the buttons below the right
or left arrows displayed, or press the Seek arrows
to go to the previous or to the next XM station within
the selected category.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV
button or BAND button to display the favorites again.
3-72
Undesired XM categories can be removed through
the setup menu. To remove an undesired category,
perform the following:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
XM CAT tab.
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for the vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
Error displays, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for the vehicle and it must be
returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
3. Turn the f knob to display the category to be
removed.
Loc or Locked: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove
tab until the category name along with the word
Removed displays.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
pushbutton under the Add tab when a removed category
displays or by pressing the pushbutton under the
Restore All tab.
Categories cannot be added or removed while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM Radio
Online for when you are not in the vehicle. A service
fee is required to receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and xmradio.ca or
call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
3-73
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 3-96 later in this
section for further detail.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears on
the CD. As each new track starts to play, the track
number displays.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller
CDs are loaded in the same manner.
LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs into the CD player.
This CD player holds up to six CDs.
Care of CDs
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Press and release the
^ button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the ^ button for two seconds.
A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
3. Press the ^ button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
3-74
If playing a CD, the sound quality can be reduced due
to CD quality, the method of recording, the quality of the
music that has been recorded, and the way the CD has
been handled. Handle them carefully. Store CD(s) in their
original cases or other protective cases and away from
direct sunlight and dust. The CD and DVD player scans
the bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD
does not play properly or not at all. Do not touch the
bottom side of a CD while handling it; this could damage
the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth
or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure the
wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
Care of the CD and DVD Player
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top
of the recorded CD with a marking pen.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player
mechanism.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
Z EJECT (Base Radio with CD):
Press to eject the
CD. If the CD is not removed, after several seconds,
the CD automatically pulls back into the player.
Z EJECT: Press to eject CD(s). To eject the CD that
is currently playing, press and release this button. A beep
sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is
ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed.
If the CD is not removed, after several seconds, the CD
automatically pulls back into the player and begins
playing.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold for
two seconds to eject all discs.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through
the tracks on the CD.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at
a reduced volume. Release to resume playing the
track. The elapsed time of the track displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
3-75
RDM (Random) (Base Radio with CD): With the
random setting, CD tracks can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order. To use random, do the
following:
1. Press to play tracks from the CD in random order.
The random icon displays.
2. Press again to turn off random play. The random
icon disappears from the display.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, tracks can
be listened to in random, rather than sequential order,
on one CD or all CDs in a six-disc CD player. To use
random, do one of the following:
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CD player,
insert a disc partway into the slot of the CD player.
A RDM tab displays.
To play the tracks from the single CD in random order,
press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM tab
until Random Current Disc displays. Press the
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CD
player, press and hold the ^ button. A beep sounds
and Load All Discs displays. Insert one or more discs
partway into the slot of the CD player.
To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc
CD player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM tab until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
3-76
RPT (Repeat) (Base Radio with CD): With the repeat
setting, one track can be repeated.
• To repeat the current track, press and release the
RPT button. An arrow symbol displays. Press again
to turn off repeat play. When repeat is off, the arrow
symbol no longer displays.
4 (Information) (Base Radio with CD):
Press to switch
the display between the track number, elapsed time
of the track, and the time. When the ignition is off, press
to display the time.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The CD remains safely inside the radio for
future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing disc and/or track number displays when a CD is
in the player. Press again and the system automatically
searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable
audio player.
Playing a CD (In Either the DVD or
CD Slot)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing
(loading a disc into the system, depending on media
type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD,
and up to 30 seconds for a DVD to begin playing).
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio is
turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped, if it was
the last selected audio source. The CD is controlled by
the buttons on the radio faceplate. The DVD/CD decks,
(upper slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is the CD
deck) of the radio are compatible with most audio CDs,
CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s/WMAs.
When a CD is inserted, the text tab DVD or CD symbol
appears on the left side of the radio display. As each
new track starts to play, the track number displays.
Z CD (Eject): Press and release to eject the CD that
is currently playing in the bottom slot. A beep sounds and
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove
Disc displays. The CD can be removed. If the CD is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed, such
as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject, press
and hold for more than five seconds to force the disc to
eject.
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release to eject the CD
that is currently playing in the top slot. A beep sounds and
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove
Disc displays. The CD can be removed. If the CD is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed, such
as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject, press
and hold for more than five seconds to force the disc to
eject.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than five seconds have played.
If less than five seconds have played, the previous track
plays. Press the right arrow to go to the next track.
If either arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the
player continues moving backward or forward through
the tracks on the CD.
3-77
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, tracks can
be listened to in random, rather than sequential order.
To play the tracks from the CD, press the DVD/CD AUX
button when not sourced to the CD, or insert a disc
partway into the slot. A RDM tab displays. Press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM tab until Random
Current Disc displays. Press the pushbutton again to turn
off random play.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD or DVD
is playing. The CD or DVD remains inside the radio
for future listening or viewing entertainment.
3-78
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to cycle through DVD,
CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The DVD/CD
text tab and a message showing track or chapter number
displays when a disc is in either slot. Press again and
the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device”
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two sources
and does not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a front
auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX button
cycles through all available options, such as: DVD slot,
CD slot, Front AUX, and Rear AUX (if available).
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this
section, or Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
on page 3-108, “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” for more
information.
If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear seat
operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote
control to navigate the CD (tracks only) through the
remote control.
Audio Output
CD Messages
Only one audio source can be heard through the
speakers at one time. An audio source is defined
as DVD slot, CD slot, XM, FM/AM, Front Aux Jack,
or Rear Aux Jack.
If these messages display and/or the CD comes out,
it could be for one of the following reasons:
Press the O button to turn the radio on. The radio can
be heard through all of the vehicle speakers.
Disk Read Error: If a disc was inserted with an invalid
or unknown format.
Front seat passengers can listen to the radio (AM, FM,
or XM) by pressing the BAND button or the DVD/CD AUX
button to select CD slot, DVD slot, front or rear auxiliary
input (if available).
Player Error: If there are disc
If a playback device is plugged into the radio’s front
auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack, the front
seat passengers is able to listen to playback from this
source through the vehicle speakers. See “Using the
Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-108,
“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” for more information.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
If the vehicle has a radio with a single CD (MP3/WMA),
a six-disc CD (MP3/WMA), or a radio with a CD and
DVD player, it is capable of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R
or CD-RW disc. For more information on how to play
an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc, see “Using
an MP3” in the index.
Optical Error: If the disc was inserted upside down.
^ or disc Z problems.
CHECK DISC: If this error message displays,
it could be for one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide
it to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
3-79
Using the DVD Player
Playing a DVD
The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on the
remote control, by the RSA system, or by the buttons
on the radio faceplate. See “Remote Control” under
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-108
for more information.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to cycle through DVD,
CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The DVD/CD
text tab and a message showing track or chapter number
displays when a disc is in either slot. Press again and
the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device”
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two sources
and does not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a front
auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX button
cycles through all available options, such as: DVD slot,
CD slot, Front AUX, and Rear AUX (if available).
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this
section, or Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
on page 3-108, “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” for more
information.
The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the
appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of
most DVDs.
The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most
audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio,
DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media along with MP3
and WMA formats.
If an error message appears on the video screen or
the radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages” under
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-108
and “DVD Radio Error Messages” in this section for
more information.
3-80
O (Power):
Press to turn the radio on or off. Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease
the volume. Press and hold for more than two seconds
turns off the entire radio and Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system and starts the parental control feature
which prevents the rear seat occupant from operating
the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system or remote control.
A lock symbol appears next to the clock display.
The parental control feature remains on until a
subsequent press and hold of the power button is
performed (more than two seconds), or until the
driver turns the ignition off and exits the vehicle.
f (Tune): Turn to change tracks on a CD or DVD,
to manually tune a radio station, or to change clock or
date settings, while in the clock or date setting mode.
See the information given earlier in this section specific to
the radio, CD, and the DVD. Also, see Setting the Clock
on page 3-65, for setting the clock and date.
© SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press to return
to the start of the current track or chapter. Press again to
go to the previous track or chapter. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter): Press to go to the
next track or chapter. This button might not work when
the DVD is playing the copyright information or the
previews.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to fast reverse the CD
or DVD, five times the normal speed. The radio displays
the elapsed time while in fast reverse. To stop fast
reversing, press again. This button might not work when
the DVD is playing the copyright information or the
previews.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to fast forward the CD
or DVD. The radio displays the elapsed time and fast
forwards five times the normal speed. To stop fast
forwarding, press again. This button might not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information or
the previews.
Z (Eject): Press to eject a CD or DVD. If a CD
or DVD is ejected, but not removed, the player
automatically pulls it back in after 15 seconds.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed,
such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject,
press and hold for more than five seconds to force
the disc to eject.
3-81
DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons
Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menu
shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the
pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during
DVD playback. See the tag options listed below for
more information.
The rear seat passenger navigates the DVD-V menus
and controls through the remote control. See “Remote
Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
on page 3-108 for more information. The Video Screen
automatically turns on when the DVD-V is inserted into
the DVD slot.
r / j (Play/Pause):
Press either play or pause
displayed on the radio system, to toggle between
pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the forward
arrow is showing on the display, the system is in
pause mode. If the pause icon is showing on the display,
the system is in playback mode. If the DVD screen is
off, press this button to turn the screen on.
Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have
finished, although there might be a delay of up to
30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing the
3-82
movie automatically, press the pushbutton located
under the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the radio.
If the DVD still does not play, refer to the on-screen
instructions, if available.
c (Stop): Press to stop playing, rewinding, or fast
forwarding a DVD.
r (Enter): Press to select the choices that are
highlighted in any menu.
y (Menu): Press to access the DVD menu. The DVD
menu is different on every DVD. Use the pushbuttons
located under the navigation arrows to navigate the
cursor through the DVD menu. After making a selection
press the enter button. This button only operates when
using a DVD.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for
navigating through the menus.
q (Return):
Press to exit the current active menu
and return to the previous menu. This button operates
only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active.
DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons
Once a DVD-A is inserted, a radio display menu
shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the
pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during
DVD playback. See the tag options listed below for more
information.
The rear seat operator navigates the DVD-A menus
and controls through the remote control. See “Remote
Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
on page 3-108 for more information. The Video Screen
does not automatically power on when the DVD-A is
inserted into the DVD slot. It must be manually turned
on by the rear seat occupant through the remote control
power button.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either play or pause
displayed on the radio system, to toggle between pausing
or restarting playback of a DVD. If the forward arrow is
showing on the display, the system is in pause mode.
If the pause icon is showing on the display, the system
is in playback mode.
q Group r: Press to cycle through musical groupings
on the DVD-A disc.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for
navigating through the menus.
e (Audio Stream): Press to cycle through audio steam
formats located on DVD-A disc. There is not any type
of notification for the customer to see through the
radio display, but video screen has a text field that
shows audio stream changing.
Inserting a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label
side up, into the loading slot. The DVD player might not
accept some paper labeled media. The player starts
loading the disc into the system and display “Loading
Disc” on the radio display. At the same time, the radio
displays a softkey menu of option(s). Some discs
automatically play the movie while others default to the
softkey menu display which requires the Play, Enter, or
Navigation softkeys to be pressed (either by softkey or
by the rear seat passenger using the remote control).
Loading a disc into the system, depending on media
type and format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD,
and up to 30 seconds for a DVD.
3-83
Stopping and Resuming Playback
Ejecting a Disc
To stop playing a DVD without turning off the system,
press the c button on the remote control, or press the
pushbutton located under the stop or the play/pause
symbol tags displayed on the radio. If the radio head
is sourced to something other than DVD-V, press
the DVD/CD AUX button to make DVD-V the active
source.
Press the Z button on the radio to eject the disc. If a
disc is ejected from the radio, but not removed, the radio
reloads the disc after a short period of time. The disc is
stored in the radio. The radio does not resume play of the
disc automatically. If the RSA system is sourced to the
DVD, the movie when reloaded into the DVD player
begins to play again. In case loading and reading of a
DVD or CD cannot be completed (unknown format, etc.),
and the disc fails to eject, press and hold the Z DVD
button more than 5 seconds to force the disc to eject.
To resume DVD playback, press the play/pause button
on the remote control, or press the pushbutton located
under the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the radio.
The DVD should resume play from where it last stopped if
the disc has not been ejected and the stop button has not
been pressed twice on the remote control. If the disc has
been ejected or the stop button has been pressed twice
on the remote control, the disc resumes playing at the
beginning of the disc.
DVD Radio Error Messages
Player Error: This message displays when there are
disc load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc
is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if the disc
is damaged.
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc
is not from a correct region.
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc is
present when the Z or DVD/CD AUX button is pressed
on the radio.
3-84
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located
on the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not
an audio output; do not plug the headphone set into
the front auxiliary input jack. An external audio device
such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD
changer, etc. can be connected to the auxiliary input
jack for use as another source for audio listening.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving
on page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.
O (Power/Volume):
Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
volume of the portable player. Additional volume
adjustments might need to be made from the portable
device if the volume does not go loud or soft enough.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and the
system begins playing audio from the connected portable
audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected,
No Input Device Found or No Aux may display.
DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary) (Radio with CD and
DVD): Press to cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary
while listening to the radio. The DVD/CD text tab and
a message showing track or chapter number displays
when a disc is in either slot. Press again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such
as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays. If a disc is
in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles between the two sources and does not
indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a front auxiliary device
is connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through
all available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front
AUX, and Rear AUX (if available). See “Using the
Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-108,
“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” for more information.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing until it is powered off.
3-85
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or
Six-Disc CD Player)
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio plays MP3 and WMA files that were recorded
on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with
the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,
64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,
160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps
or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album
are displayed by the radio when recorded using ID3 tags
version 1 and 2.
Compressed Audio
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA
files. By default the radio reads only the uncompressed
audio and ignores the MP3/WMA files. Pressing the
CAT (category) button toggles between compressed
and uncompressed audio format.
3-86
MP3/WMA Format
If you burn an MP3/WMA disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
one disc.
• The CD player is able to read and play a maximum
of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total number
of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the
complexity and confusion in trying to locate a
particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension
(other file extensions might not work).
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists can cause the player to be unable to play
up to the maximum number of files, folders, playlists,
or sessions. To play a larger number of files, folders,
playlists, or sessions, minimize the length of the file,
folder, or playlist name. Long names also take up
more space on the display and might not fully
display.
• Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc can cause the disc not
to function in the player.
Playlists can be changed by using S c (previous)
and c T (next) folder buttons, the f knob, or the
SEEK arrows. An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW that
was recorded using no file folders can also be played.
If a CD-R CD-RW contains more than the maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files, the player will
access and navigate up to the maximum, but all items
over the maximum are not accessible.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as
a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,
the directory displays as F1 ROOT. All files contained
directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
accessed before root folders or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and
no compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions are not displayed on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then go to the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder, the
radio displays ROOT.
3-87
Order of Play
Preprogrammed Playlists
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder
and continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder has
played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
Playing an MP3/WMA
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot (Single
CD Player), or press the ^ button and wait for the
message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label side
up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW should
begin playing.
When play enters a new folder, the display does
not automatically show the new folder name unless
the folder mode was chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or
CD-RW in the player, it stays in the player. When the
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R or CD-RW starts
to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio
source.
File System and Naming
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename displays.
3-88
Z EJECT: Press to eject CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s).
To eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing,
press and release this button. A beep sounds and
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove
Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can be removed.
If the CD-R is not removed, after several seconds, the
CD-R or CD-RW automatically pulls back into the player
and begins playing.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this button for
two seconds to eject all discs.
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA files on the CD-R
or CD-RW currently playing.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than
ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to
go to the next MP3/WMA file. If either SEEK arrow is held
or pressed multiple times, the player continues moving
backward or forward through MP3/WMA files on the CD.
S c (Previous Folder):
Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder tab to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder):
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback
quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release this button to resume playing
the file. The elapsed time of the file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard
at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume
playing the file. The elapsed time of the file displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3 files
on the CD-R can be listened to in random, rather than
sequential order, on one CD-R/CD-RW or all discs in
a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of the
following:
1. To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or CD-RW
in random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM tab until Random Current Disc
displays. Press the same pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc
CD player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM tab until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder tab to go to the first track in the
next folder.
3-89
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW in order
by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located below
the music navigator tab. The player scans the disc to
sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information.
It can take several minutes to scan the disc depending
on the number of MP3/WMA files recorded to the CD-R
or CD-RW. The radio can begin playing while it is
scanning the disc in the background. When the scan
is finished, the CD-R or CD-RW begins playing again.
To change from playback by artist to playback by album,
press the pushbutton located below the Sort By tab. From
the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the album
button. Press the pushbutton below the back tab to return
to the main music navigator screen. Now the album name
is displayed on the second line between the arrows and
songs from the current album begins to play. Once all
songs from that album are played, the player moves to
the next album in alphabetical order on the CD-R/CD-RW
and begin playing MP3/WMA files from that album.
Once the disc has been scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current
artist playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist are
played, the player moves to the next artist in alphabetical
order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3
files by that artist. To listen to MP3/WMA files by another
artist, press the pushbutton located below either arrow
button. The CD goes to the next or previous artist in
alphabetical order. Continue pressing either button
until the desired artist displays.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back tab to return to normal MP3/WMA
playback.
3-90
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio for
future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing disc and/or track number displays when a CD
is in the player. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such
as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and
DVD Player)
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA
files depending on which slot the disc is loaded into.
By default the radio reads only the uncompressed audio
(.CDA) and ignores the MP3/WMA files on the DVD
deck. On the CD deck, pressing the CAT (category)
button toggles between compressed and uncompressed
audio format, the default being the uncompressed
format (.CDA).
MP3/WMA Format
If you burn an MP3/WMA disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
one disc.
• The CD player (lower slot) is able to read and play
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up
to 8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate
a particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .m3u, .wpl or .pls
extension, other file extensions might not work.
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists can cause the player to be unable to
play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
playlists, or sessions. To play a larger number
of files, folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize
the length of the file, folder or playlist name. Long
names also take up more space on the display.
• Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc can cause the disc
not to function in the player.
a maximum combination of 512 files and folders.
The DVD player (upper slot) is able to read
255 folders, 15 playlists and 40 sessions.
3-91
Root Directory
Order of Play
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as
a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,
the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained
directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
accessed before root folders or files.
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file
structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions are not displayed on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then go to the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder the
radio displays ROOT.
3-92
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first folder.
When play enters a new folder, the display does
not automatically show the new folder name unless
the folder mode is chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
Playing an MP3 (In Either the DVD or
CD Slot)
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into either the top or
bottom slot, label side up. The player pulls it in, and
the CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing.
Depending on the format of the disc, a softkey menu
appears and allow navigation of the disc. The menu
reads left to right as RDM (Randomize song play order),
a Folder icon with left and right arrows (to move up or
down through available folders), a PL tag if the disc has a
Playlist available, and a Music Navigator tag. If a Playlist
tag is shown, toggling this key brings up a Folder softkey
only or the menu as previously described.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or
CD-RW in the player, it stays in the player. When the
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R or CD-RW starts
to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio
source.
Z CD (Eject): Press and release this button to eject
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the bottom
slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the
disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or
CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW
automatically pulls back into the player.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed, such
as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject, press
and hold this button for more than five seconds to force
the disc to eject.
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release to eject the CD-R
or CD-RW that is currently playing in the top slot. A beep
sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is
ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW
can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed,
after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW automatically
pulls back into the player. If loading and reading of a CD
cannot be completed, such as unknown format, etc., and
the disc fails to eject, press and hold this button for more
than five seconds to force the disc to eject.
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA files on the CD-R
or CD-RW currently playing.
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.
3-93
©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than
five seconds have played. If less than five seconds have
played, the previous MP3/WMA file plays. Press the right
SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA file. If either
SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through the
MP3/WMA files on the CD.
S c (Previous Folder):
Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder tab to go to the first
track in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder):
Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder tab to go to the first track in the
next folder.
s REV (Reverse):
Press and hold to reverse playback
quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release this button to resume playing
the file. The elapsed time of the file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard
at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume
playing the file. The elapsed time of the file displays.
3-94
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA
files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be played in random,
rather than sequential order. To listen to MP3/WMA files
from the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in
random order, press the pushbutton positioned under the
RDM tab until Random Current Disc displays. Press the
same pushbutton again to turn off random play.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW
in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located
below the music navigator tab. The player scans the disc
to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information.
It can take several minutes to scan the disc depending
on the number of MP3/WMA files recorded to the CD-R
or CD-RW.
To cancel music navigator while the player is scanning,
press the pushbutton located below the music navigator
tab or eject the disc.
The radio could begin playing while it is scanning the disc
in the background. When the scan is finished, the CD-R
or CD-RW begins playing again.
Once the disc has been scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current
artist playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows. To listen to MP3/WMA files by
another artist, press the pushbutton located below either
arrow tab. Continue pressing either button until the
desired artist is displayed.
To change from playback by artist to playback by album,
press the pushbutton located below the Sort By tab. From
the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the album
button. Press the pushbutton below the back tab to return
to the main music navigator screen. The album name
displays on the second line between the arrows and
songs from the current album begins to play. Once all
songs from that album are played, the player moves to
the next album in alphabetical order on the CD-R/CD-RW
and begins playing MP3/WMA files from that album.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back tab to return to normal MP3/WMA
playback.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to cycle through DVD,
CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The DVD/CD
text tab and a message showing track or chapter number
displays when a disc is in either slot. Press this button
again and the system automatically searches for an
auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio player.
If a portable audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input
Device” displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and
the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the
two sources and does not indicate “No Aux Input Device”.
If a front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles through all available options, such as: DVD
slot, CD slot, Front AUX, and Rear AUX (if available).
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this
section, or Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
on page 3-108 Rear Seat Entertainment System,
“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” for more information.
If a MP3/WMA is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear seat
operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote
control to navigate the CD (tracks only) through the
remote control.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD or a
DVD is playing. The CD or DVD remains inside the radio
for future listening or viewing entertainment.
3-95
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly,
but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune in to another channel.
Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with your XM Subscription package.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel
is no longer assigned. Tune to another station.
If this station was one of the presets, choose another
station for that preset button.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
3-96
No Title Info: No song title information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
No CAT Info: No category information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle could
have previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having the
vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have
a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have
a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
Navigation/Radio System
For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the
separate Navigation System manual.
®
Bluetooth
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make
and receive phone calls. The system can be used while
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position.
The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 30 ft.
(9.1 m). Not all phones support all functions, and not
all phones are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system. See gm.com/bluetooth for more
information on compatible phones.
Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum.
The system may not recognize voice commands if
there is too much background noise.
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural
voice.
Audio System
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers
and overrides the audio system. Use the audio system
volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level.
The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later
calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume level
is used if the volume is turned down too low.
3-97
Bluetooth Controls
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-117 for more
information.
b g (Push To Talk):
Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
c x (Phone On Hook):
Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.
Pairing
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not
connected, calls will be made using OnStar® Hands-Free
Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner’s guide for
more information.
3-98
Pairing Information:
• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system.
• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is
moving.
• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.
• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
• Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
Pairing a Phone
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the
system will say “Is connected” after the connected
phone.
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on this
process.
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the
list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number
that was provided in Step 3.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
a name that best describes the phone. This name
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone.
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>?
Yes or No” followed by a tone.
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
3-99
Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with
“Store, number please” followed by a tone.
• If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
• If another phone is not found, the original phone
remains connected.
Storing Name Tags
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
• Store
• Digit Store
• Directory
3-100
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
• If the system recognizes the number it responds
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone number.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats the
number followed by “Please say yes or no”. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is not
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the
number to be re-entered.
4. After the system stores the phone number, it
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
Using the Digit Store Command
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
3-101
Using the Directory Command
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
Deleting Name Tags
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
• Delete
• Delete all name tags
Using the Delete Command
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
To use the delete command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
3-102
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete, <name
tag>? Please say yes or no”.
• If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
the name tag. The system responds with “OK,
deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”
• If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The system
responds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please say
the name tag.”
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar
(if present).
To use the delete all name tags command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the
main menu.
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands:
•
•
•
•
Dial
Digit Dial
Call
Re-dial
Using the Dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>”. “Number please” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
• If the system recognizes the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
• If the system does not recognize the number,
Using the Digit Dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit
dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit
to dial” followed by a tone.
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
If the number is not correct, say “No”. The system
will ask for the number to be re-entered.
3-103
Using the Call Command
Using the Re-dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds
with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the
last number called from the connected Bluetooth
phone.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed by
a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The
system responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>”
and dials the number. If the name tag is not
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the
name tag to be re-entered.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
3-104
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
• Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
• Press c x to ignore a call.
Call Waiting
Ending a Call
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
Press
• Press b g to answer an incoming call when
another call is active. The original call is placed
on hold.
• Press b g again to return to the original call.
• To ignore the incoming call, continue with the
original call with no action.
• Press c x to disconnect the current call and
switch to the call on hold.
c x to end a call.
Muting a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can
be muted so that the person on the other end of the
call cannot hear them.
To Mute a call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with
“Call muted”.
Three-Way Calling
Three-Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier
to work.
1. While on a call press b g . The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
To Cancel Mute
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
4. Once the call is connected, press
the callers together.
b g to link all
3-105
Transferring a Call
Voice Pass-Thru
Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes after
the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.
3-106
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with
“OK, accessing <phone name>”.
• The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone’s
operating instructions.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is used
when calling a menu driven phone system. Account
numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for
retrieval during menu driven calls.
Sending a Number During a Call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the number to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
3. Say the name tag to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the
name tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the
name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely.
This includes all saved name tags in the phonebook
and phone pairing information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the above sections on
Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
3-107
Other Information
®
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by
the Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
3-108
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System
The vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system. The RSE system works with the vehicle’s
audio system. The DVD player is part of the front radio.
The RSE system includes a radio with a DVD player,
a video display screen, audio/video jacks, two wireless
headphones, and a remote control. See Radio(s) on
page 3-67 for more information on the vehicle’s audio/
DVD system.
Parental Control
The RSE system may have a Parental Control feature,
depending on which radio the vehicle has. To enable
Parental Control, press and hold the radio power button
for more than two seconds to stop all system features
such as: radio, video screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD.
While Parental Control is on, a padlock icon displays.
When the radio is turned back on, Parental Control
is unlocked.
Before Driving
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen
while driving and should not try to do so.
In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE
system might not work until the temperature is within
the operating range. The operating range for the RSE
system is above −4°F (−20°C) or below 140°F (60°C).
If the temperature of the vehicle is outside of this range,
heat or cool the vehicle until the temperature is within the
operating range of the RSE system.
Headphones
The RSE includes two sets of wireless headphones that
are only dedicated to this system. These headphones
are used to listen to the DVD radio or an auxiliary device
connected to the RCA jacks. The wireless headphones
have an ON/OFF switch and a volume control.
To use the headphones, turn the switch to ON. An
indicator light located on the headphones illuminates.
If the light does not illuminate, the batteries might need
to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in
this section for more information. Switch the headphones
to OFF when not in use.
The infrared transmitters are located in the display
below the video screen. The headphones shut off
automatically to save the battery power if the RSE
system and RSA are shut off or if the headphones
are out of range of the transmitters for more than
three minutes. If you move too far forward or step out
of the vehicle, the headphones lose the audio signal.
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
volume control located on the right side.
For optimal audio performance, the headphones must
be worn correctly. Headphones should be worn with
headband over the top of the head for best audio
reception. The symbol L (Left) appears on the upper left
side, above the ear pad and should be positioned on the
left ear. The symbol R (Right) appears on the upper right
side, above the ear pad and should be positioned on the
right ear.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs will not be covered by the warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
The foam ear pads attached to the headphones can
become worn or damaged if they are not handled or
stored properly. If the foam ear pads do become
damaged or worn out, the pads can be replaced
separately from the headphone set. It is not necessary
to replace the complete headphone set. The headphone
replacement foam ear pads can be ordered in pairs.
See your dealer/retailer for more information.
3-109
Battery Replacement
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
To change the batteries on the headphones, do the
following:
1. Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located
on the left side of the headphones. Slide the
battery door open.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Replace the battery door and tighten the door
screw.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
The A/V jacks are located on the rear of the floor
console. The A/V jacks allow audio or video signals
to be connected from an auxiliary device such as
a camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.
Adapter connectors or cables might be required to
connect the auxiliary device to the A/V jacks. Refer
to the manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
The A/V jacks are color coded to match typical home
entertainment system equipment. The yellow jack (A) is
for the video input. The white jack (B) is for the left
audio input. The red jack is (C) for the right audio input.
Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the
radio system.
3-110
To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded A/V jacks
and turn both the auxiliary device and the video screen
power on. If the video screen is in the DVD player mode,
pressing the AUX button on the remote control switches
the video screen from the DVD player mode to the
auxiliary device. The radio can listen to the audio of
the connected auxiliary device by sourcing to auxiliary.
See Radio(s) on page 3-67 for more information.
Audio Output
How to Change the RSE Video Screen
Settings
The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to
the wireless headphones, if there is audio available.
See “Headphones” earlier in this section for more
information.
The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom),
screen brightness, and setup menu language can be
changed from the on screen setup menu. To change
any feature, perform the following:
1. Press the
control.
z (display menu) button on the remote
2. Use the remote control menu n , q , p , o
(navigation) arrows and the r (enter) button
to use the setup menu.
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be
heard through the following possible sources:
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat
audio system, if the vehicle has this feature.
When a device is connected to the radio’s auxiliary
input jack, if the vehicle has this feature, or A/V jacks,
the rear seat passengers are able to hear audio from
the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired
headphones. The front seat passengers are able to
listen to playback from this device through the vehicle
speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio.
3. Press the z button again to remove the setup
menu from the screen.
3-111
Video Screen
Remote Control
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its
locked position.
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window at the rear of the RSE overhead console and
press the desired button. Direct sunlight or very bright
light can affect the ability of the RSE transmitter to
receive signals from the remote control. If the remote
control does not seem to be working, the batteries may
need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later
in this section. Objects blocking the line of sight can
also affect the function of the remote control.
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked
position, the screen remains on, this is normal, and the
DVD continues to play through the previous audio source.
Use the remote control O button or Z the disc to turn
off the screen.
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot, the remote
control power button can be used to turn on the video
screen display and start the disc. The radio can also
turn on the video screen display. See Radio(s) on
page 3-67 for more information.
The overhead console contains the IR transmitters
for the wireless headphones and the IR receivers for
the remote control. They are located at the rear of
the console.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight can damage it, and the repairs will
not be covered by the warranty. Storage in extreme
cold can weaken the batteries. Keep the remote
control stored in a cool, dry place.
To use the video screen, do the following:
1. Push the release button located on the overhead
console.
2. Move the screen to the desired position.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen,
as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for more information.
3-112
Remote Control Buttons
y (Main Menu): Press this button to access the DVD
menu. The DVD menu is different on every DVD.
Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around
the DVD menu. After making a selection press the enter
button. This button only operates when using a DVD.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use
the navigation arrows to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choice that
is highlighted in any menu.
z (Display Menu): Press this button to adjust the
brightness, screen display mode (normal, full, or zoom),
and display the language menu.
q (Return):
O (Power):
Press this button to turn the video screen
on and off.
P (Illumination):
Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on. The backlight automatically times
out after 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed
while the backlight is on.
v (Title):
Press this button to return the DVD to
the main menu of the DVD. This function varies for
each disc.
Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu.
This button operates only when the display menu
or a DVD menu is active.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD. Press this button twice to
return to the beginning of the DVD.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start playing a
DVD. Press this button while a DVD is playing to pause
it. Press it again to continue playing the DVD.
3-113
When the DVD is playing, depending on the radio, slow
play may be performed by pressing the play/pause button
then pressing the fast forward button. The DVD continues
playing in a slow play mode. Depending on the radio,
slow reverse may be performed by pressing the play/
pause button and then pressing the fast reverse button
while a DVD is playing. To cancel slow play mode, press
this button.
t (Previous Track/Chapter):
Press this button to
return to the start of the current track or chapter.
Press this button again to go to the previous track or
chapter. This button might not work when the DVD
is playing the copyright information or the previews.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to go to
the beginning of the next chapter or track. This button
might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
r (Fast Reverse):
Press this button to fast reverse
the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing a DVD video,
press the play/pause button. To stop fast reversing
a DVD audio or CD, release the fast reverse button.
This button might not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the previews.
3-114
[ (Fast Forward):
Press this button to fast forward the
DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding a DVD video, press
the play/pause button. To stop fast forwarding a DVD
audio or CD, release the fast forward button. This button
might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
e (Audio): Press this button to change audio tracks
on DVDs that have this feature when the DVD is playing.
The format and content of this function vary for each disc.
{ (Subtitles):
Press this button to turn ON/OFF
subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of this function
vary for each disc.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the system
between the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
d (Camera): Press this button to change camera
angles on DVDs that have this feature when a DVD is
playing. The format and content of this function vary
for each disc.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides the capability of direct chapter or track
number selection.
\ (Clear): Press this button within three seconds after
inputting a numeric selection, to clear all numeric inputs.
Problem
No power.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries):
Press this button to
select chapter or track numbers greater than 9.
Press this button before inputting the number.
If the remote control becomes lost or damaged,
a new universal remote control can be purchased.
If this happens, make sure the universal remote control
uses a code set of Toshiba®.
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control batteries, do the following:
1. Slide the rear cover back on the remote control.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly,
using the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Replace the battery cover.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period
of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
The picture does not
fill the screen. There
are black borders on
the top and bottom or
on both sides or it looks
stretched out.
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
Recommended Action
The ignition might not be
turned ON/RUN or in
ACC/ACCESSORY.
Check the display mode
settings in the setup menu
by pressing the display
menu button on the remote
control.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
The remote control does
Check to make sure there
not work.
is no obstruction between
the remote control and
the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
incorrectly.
After stopping the player,
If the stop button was
I push Play but sometimes pressed one time, the DVD
the DVD starts where I left player resumes playing
off and sometimes at the
where the DVD was
beginning.
stopped. If the stop button
was pressed two times
the DVD player begins to
play from the beginning of
the DVD.
3-115
Problem
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Recommended Action
Check that the RSE video
screen is in the auxiliary
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
Sometimes the wireless
Check for obstructions,
headphone audio cuts out low batteries, reception
or buzzes.
range, and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using a
cellular telephone in
the vehicle.
Check that the
headphones are on
correctly using the L (left)
and R (right) on the
headphones.
I lost the remote and/or
See your dealer/retailer
the headphones.
for assistance.
The DVD is playing, but
Check that the RSE video
there is no picture or
screen is sourced to the
sound.
DVD player.
DVD Display Error Messages
The DVD display error message depends on which
radio the vehicle has. The video screen can display
one of the following:
Disc Load/Eject Error: This message displays when
there are disc load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc
is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if
the disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc
is not from a correct region.
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc is
present when the Z button is pressed on the radio.
DVD Distortion
Video distortion may occur when operating cellular
phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player
when operating one of these devices in or near the
vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
3-116
Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console
When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface,
use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.
Cleaning the Video Screen
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth
dampened with clean water. Use care when directly
touching or cleaning the screen, as damage can result.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending
on the vehicle’s options.
Some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
w (Next): Press to go to the next radio station stored
as a favorite, or the next track if a CD/DVD is playing.
c x (Phone On Hook / Previous):
Press to go
to the previous radio station stored as a favorite,
the previous track if a CD/DVD is playing, to reject
an incoming call, or end a current call.
3-117
b g (Push to Talk / Mute): Press to silence the
vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with OnStar® or Bluetooth systems press
and hold b g for longer than two seconds to interact
with those systems. See OnStar® System on page 2-39
and Bluetooth® on page 3-97 in this manual for more
information.
SRCE (Source): Press to switch between the radio
(AM, FM, XM), CD, and for vehicles with, DVD,
front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.
+ e − e (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
the radio volume.
¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next radio station while
in AM, FM, or XM™. Press ¨ to go to the next track
or chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot. Press
the ¨ if multiple discs are loaded to go to the next disc
while sourced to a CD player.
3-118
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit that
automatically works to reduce interference, some
static can occur, especially around tall buildings
or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Multi-Band Antenna
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to
fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of the XM signal for a period of time.
The multi-band antenna is located on the roof of the
vehicle. The antenna is used for the AM/FM radio,
OnStar® and the XM™ Satellite Radio Service System,
if the vehicle has these features. Keep the antenna
clear of obstructions for clear reception. If the vehicle
has a sunroof, the performance of the AM/FM radio,
OnStar®, and the XM system may be affected if
the sunroof is open.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when making
or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery,
or simply having the phone on. This interference causes
an increased level of static while listening to the radio.
If static is received while listening to the radio, unplug
the cellular phone and turn it off.
3-119
✍ NOTES
3-120
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ............4-2
Driving for Better Fuel Economy .......................4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunk Driving .................................................4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-4
Braking .........................................................4-4
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-5
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-5
StabiliTrak® System ........................................4-6
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-7
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .........................4-9
Steering ......................................................4-10
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-12
Passing .......................................................4-12
Loss of Control .............................................4-12
Driving at Night ............................................4-14
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-14
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-15
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-16
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-16
Winter Driving ..............................................4-17
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice, or Snow .............................................4-20
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-21
Loading the Vehicle ......................................4-21
Towing ..........................................................4-27
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-27
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-27
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-34
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
•
•
•
•
Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
When road and weather conditions are appropriate,
use cruise control, if equipped.
• Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
• Combine several trips into a single trip.
• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Spec
number molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.
• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
4-2
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-12.
{ CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
Drunk Driving
{ CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.
You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision
if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home
in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annual
motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
4-3
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems than the tires and
road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the
vehicle. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-7.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-30.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a second.
But that is only an average. It might be less with one
driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination,
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and
frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second, a
vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet
(20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,
so keeping enough space between the vehicle and others
is important.
4-4
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or
icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight of
the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool between
hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a
lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and
allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking and
longer brake life.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakes
are pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down.
If the engine stops, there will still be some power brake
assist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Once
the power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a
braking skid.
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going
on, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal
moves a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light
stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light on
page 3-31.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps receiving
updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to get
a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping
distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that
vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let antilock work. The antilock pump or motor
might be heard operating and the brake pedal might be
felt to pulsate, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than
even the very best braking.
4-5
Brake Assist
This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to
assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed
in emergency driving conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake control module to
supplement the power brake system under conditions
where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down
the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic brake control
module increases brake pressure at each corner of the
vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal
pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal
and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal
as the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature
will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is
released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased.
StabiliTrak® System
The vehicle has the StabiliTrak system, an advanced
computer controlled system that helps the driver maintain
directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving
conditions. This is accomplished by selectively applying
any one of the vehicle’s brakes and reducing power.
The StabiliTrak system comes on automatically whenever
the vehicle is started.
4-6
The STABILITRAK NOT READY message may be
displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC) and
the StabiliTrak/Traction Control System (TCS) warning
light will come on the instrument panel cluster after first
driving the vehicle and exceeding 30 mph 48 (km/h) for
30 seconds. The StabiliTrak system is off until the light
has turned off. This could take up to 15 minutes. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-49 for more
information.
The StabiliTrak/TCS
warning light on the
instrument panel cluster
will flash when the system
is operating.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working.
This is normal. This light may also come on after
extended heavy braking, indicating the brakes have
become too hot to limit wheel spin.
StabiliTrak can be turned
off using the StabiliTrak/
TCS control button.
To disable StabiliTrak, press and hold the traction control
button until the StabiliTrak/TCS warning light comes on
the instrument panel. StabiliTrak can be activated again
by pressing the StabiliTrak/TCS button.
The SERVICE STABILITRAK message will be displayed
and the StabiliTrak/TCS warning light on the instrument
panel cluster will come on if there is a problem with the
system. When this light and the SERVICE STABILITRAK
message are on, the system is not operational. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road
conditions. The system operates only if it senses that one
or more of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose
traction. When this happens, the system works the
brakes and reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
This light flashes while the
traction control system is
limiting wheel spin.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working, but
this is normal. This light may also come on after extended
heavy braking indicating the brakes have become too hot
to limit wheel spin.
4-7
TCS automatically comes on whenever the vehicle is
started. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, the system should always be left on. But TCS
can be turned off if needed. The system should be turned
off if the vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or
snow and rocking the vehicle is required. See Rocking
Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-21.
TCS can be turned
off by pressing the
StabiliTrak/TCS button,
located next to the
gear shift lever.
When TCS is turned off, the StabiliTrak/TCS warning
light comes on the instrument panel cluster and
TRACTION CONTROL OFF briefly displays.
4-8
The traction control system can be activated again by
pressing the traction control button. While the traction
control system is activated, the StabiliTrak/TCS warning
light comes on the instrument panel cluster and
TRACTION CONTROL ON briefly displays.
If the system is limiting wheel spin when the button is
pressed, the StabiliTrak/TCS warning light comes on the
instrument panel cluster. The system will not turn off
until there is no longer a current need to limit wheel
spin. Turn the system back on by pressing the button
again. If the light does not come on, TCS might not
be working and the vehicle should be serviced by
your dealer/retailer.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3 for more information.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
If the vehicle has all-wheel drive (AWD), the AWD
system operates automatically without any action
required by the driver. If the front drive wheels begin to
slip, the rear wheels will automatically begin to drive
the vehicle as required. Torque is also applied to
the rear wheels during launches. There may be a slight
engagement noise during hard use but this is normal.
The Service All-Wheel
Drive Light is located on
the instrument panel
cluster.
This light and the SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
message in the DIC will come on and stay on to
indicate there may be a problem with the drive system
and service is required.
See Service All-Wheel Drive Light on page 3-39 and
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-49 for
more information.
The All-Wheel Drive
Disabled Light comes on
along with the ALL WHEEL
DRIVE OFF message
when the rear drive system
is overheating.
This light will turn off when the rear drive system cools
down. If this light stays on, it must be reset. To reset
the light, turn the ignition off and then back on again.
If the light stays on, see your dealer/retailer for service.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-49 for
more information.
4-9
Steering
Electric Power Steering
(3.4L V6 Engine)
If the engine stalls while driving, the power steering
assist system will continue to operate until you are able to
stop the vehicle. If power steering assist is lost because
the electric power steering system is not functioning, the
vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several
times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the
stopped position for an extended amount of time, you
may notice a reduced amount of power steering assist.
The normal amount of power steering assist should
return shortly after a few normal steering movements.
The electric power steering system does not require
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system
problems, such as abnormally high steering effort for a
prolonged period of time, contact your dealer/retailer
for service repairs.
4-10
Hydraulic Power Steering
(3.6L V6 Engine)
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops
or the power steering system is not functioning, the
vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through
the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.
Wait to accelerate until out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. These
problems can be avoided by braking — if you can
stop in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time
because there is no room. That is the time for evasive
action — steering around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes. See Braking on page 4-4.
It is better to remove as much speed as possible
from a collision. Then steer around the problem,
to the left or right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and
a quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turned
a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the
object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-11
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm, (about
one-eighth turn) until the right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
4-12
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If the traction system is off, then
an acceleration skid is best handled by easing your foot
off the accelerator pedal. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 4-7 and StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more
limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the
tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for
a second skid if it occurs.
4-13
Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
Night driving tips include:
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
{ CAUTION:
rearview mirror.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
so much road ahead.
•
•
•
•
•
Watch for animals.
When tired, pull off the road.
Do not wear sunglasses.
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
4-14
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
•
•
•
•
•
Allow extra following distance.
Pass with caution.
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
clean — inside and outside?
•
•
•
•
Wiper Blades: In good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-51.
• Turn off cruise control.
4-15
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
Other driving tips include:
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
{ CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
4-16
Winter Driving
{ CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the engine running
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain begins
to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid driving on wet
ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt
or sand.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
The Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-7
improves the ability to accelerate on slippery roads, but
slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions.
When driving through deep snow, turn off the traction
control system to help maintain vehicle motion at lower
speeds.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-5 improves
vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads, but
apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement.
4-17
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.
To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
{ CAUTION:
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
• Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
• Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
• Open a window about two inches (5 cm) on
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
CAUTION:
4-18
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 2-35.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to keep warm
also helps.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal
slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed.
This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and
to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as little as
possible to save fuel.
4-19
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-21.
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help
to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
{ CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,
they can explode, and you or others could be
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin
the wheels as little as possible and avoid going
above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-74.
4-20
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading the Vehicle
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area
around the front wheels. Turn off any traction or stability
system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning
the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a
rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not
get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be
towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see
Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-27.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicle
show how much weight it may properly carry,
the Tire and Loading Information label and
the Vehicle Certification label.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
4-21
Tire and Loading Information Label
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s door open,
you will find the label attached below the
door lock post (striker).
4-22
The tire and loading information label lists the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds. The vehicle capacity weight includes
the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all
nonfactory-installed options.
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation, see
Tires on page 5-51 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-58.
There is also important loading information on
the Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear
axles. See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this
section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity for your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 4-34 for important information
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.
4-23
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
4-24
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Example 2
Total
Item
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
300 lbs (136 kg)
B
700 lbs (317 kg)
C
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
maximum vehicle capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.
Example 3
Item
A
B
C
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
4-25
Certification Label
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh
your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this.
Be sure to spread out your load equally on both
sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
{ CAUTION:
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found
on the rear edge of the driver’s door, or on
the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar).
The label shows the size of your original tires and
the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, and cargo.
4-26
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — they
will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
keep going.
{ CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be
towed with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your
dealer/retailer or a professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-7.
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome,
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle
with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up
on a device known as a dolly.
4-27
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Dinghy Towing (Vehicles with a
5-speed Transmission)
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• What is the distance that will be travelled? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
• Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Long Trip on page 4-15.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle
with any of its wheels on the ground.
The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all of its
wheels on the ground. If the vehicle is front-wheel drive, it
can be towed with two of its wheels on the ground. See
“Dolly Towing” following. If the vehicle is all-wheel-drive,
it cannot be towed with any of its wheels on the ground.
It must be towed with a platform truck or trailer.
4-28
Dinghy Towing (Vehicles with a
6-speed Transmission)
If the vehicle is all-wheel-drive, it can be dinghy towed
from the front. These vehicles can also be towed by
placing them on a platform trailer with all four wheels
off of the ground. These vehicles cannot be towed using
a dolly.
For vehicles being dinghy towed, re-install the fuse and
run the vehicle at the beginning of each day and at
each RV fuel stop for about five minutes. This will
ensure proper lubrication of transmission components.
To tow a vehicle with a 6–speed transmission from
the front with all four wheels on the ground:
1. Position the vehicle being towed behind the tow
vehicle and shift the transmission to P (Park).
2. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
3. Firmly set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is front-wheel-drive, it can be dinghy towed
from the front. These vehicles may also be towed by
putting the front wheels on a dolly. See “Dolly Towing”
later in this section.
4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow
vehicle.
5. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.
6. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
4-29
7. To prevent the battery from draining while the vehicle
is being towed, remove the 50 amp BATT1 fuse from
the engine compartment fuse block and store in a
safe location. See Engine Compartment Fuse Block
on page 5-99.
8. Release the parking brake.
Dolly Towing (Front-Wheel-Drive
Vehicles with a 5-speed Transmission)
Notice: If the vehicle is towed without performing
each of the steps listed under “Dinghy Towing,”
the automatic transmission could be damaged.
Be sure to follow all steps of the dinghy towing
procedure prior to and after towing the vehicle.
Notice: If 65 mph (105 km/h) is exceeded while
towing the vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing the vehicle.
Once the destination has been reached:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Reinstall the 50 amp BATT1 fuse to the engine
compartment fuse block.
3. Shift the transmission to P (Park), turn the ignition
to LOCK/OFF and remove the key from the ignition.
4. Release the parking brake.
Notice: Do not tow a vehicle with the front drive
wheels on the ground if one of the front tires
is a compact spare tire. Towing with two different
tire sizes on the front of the vehicle can cause
severe damage to the transmission.
4-30
To dolly tow a front-wheel drive vehicle with a 5–speed
transmission from the front with two of its wheels on
the ground:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the dolly.
3. Shift the transmission to P (Park).
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
with a 5-speed Transmission)
5. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for
towing.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Release the parking brake only after the
vehicle being towed is firmly attached to
the dolly.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle
with any of its wheels on the ground.
If the vehicle is all-wheel-drive with a 5–speed
transmission, it cannot be towed with any of its
wheels on the ground. It must be towed with a
platform truck or trailer.
4-31
Dolly Towing (Front-Wheel-Drive
Vehicles with a 6-speed Transmission)
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the dolly.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
with a 6-speed Transmission)
To tow a front-wheel-drive vehicle from the front with
two wheels on the ground:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the dolly.
3. Shift the transmission to P (Park).
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
5. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
4-32
All-wheel-drive vehicles must not be towed with two
wheels on the ground. To properly tow these vehicles,
they should be placed on a platform truck or trailer
with all four wheels off of the ground or dinghy towed
from the front.
Towing the Vehicle From the Rear
Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Never have the vehicle towed
from the rear.
4-33
Towing a Trailer
{ CAUTION:
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or
even at all. The driver and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may also be
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only
if all the steps in this section have been followed.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section and see your
dealer/retailer for important information about
towing a trailer with the vehicle.
4-34
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment.
To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the
information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in
this section.
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration,
braking, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe
trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used
properly.
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these
are important for your safety and that of your passengers.
So please read this section carefully before pulling a
trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, wheel assemblies and tires are forced
to work harder against the drag of the added weight.
The engine is required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat.
The trailer also adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
Pulling A Trailer
Here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
the rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you will be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission
to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often
under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
(90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle’s parts.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• Weight of the trailer
• Weight of the trailer tongue
• Weight on your vehicle’s tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
The vehicle can tow up to 3,500 lbs (1 575 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much
the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. It can
depend on any special equipment on the vehicle, and the
amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry. See
“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this section for
more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6 for more
information.
4-35
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the
vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and the
people who will be riding in the vehicle. If there are a lot of
options, equipment, passengers or cargo in the vehicle,
it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can carry,
which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can
tow. If towing a trailer, the tongue load must be added to
the GVW because the vehicle will be carrying that weight,
too. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-21 for more
information about the vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
If a weight-carrying hitch or a weight-distributing hitch
is being used, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh
10-15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
4-36
Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires
Safety Chains
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. These numbers can be found on
the Certification label or see Loading the Vehicle on
page 4-21 for more information. Make sure not to go
over the GVW limit for the vehicle, or the GAWR,
including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer.
Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to
help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about
safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough
slack so the rig can turn. Never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.
• The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
• Will any holes be made in the body of the vehicle
when the trailer hitch is installed? If so, be sure to
seal the holes when the hitch is removed. If they
are not sealed, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from
the engine’s exhaust can get into the vehicle. See
Engine Exhaust on page 2-35. Sealing the holes will
also prevent dirt and water from entering the vehicle.
Trailer Brakes
A loaded trailer that weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(450 kg) needs to have its own brake system that is
adequate for the weight of the trailer. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
they are installed, adjusted and maintained properly.
Because the vehicle has StabiliTrak, do not try to
tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you do,
both brake systems will not work well, or at all.
4-37
Driving with a Trailer
{ CAUTION:
When towing a trailer, exhaust gases may collect
at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate,
trunk/hatch, or rear-most window is open.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
To maximize safety when towing a trailer:
• Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks
and make necessary repairs before starting
a trip.
• Never drive with the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or
rear-most window open.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 2-35.
4-38
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Get to know the rig before setting out for the open road.
Get acquainted with the feel of handling and braking with
the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind
that the vehicle you are driving is now longer and not as
responsive as the vehicle is by itself.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This checks the electrical
connection at the same time.
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Electronic Trailer Sway Control
Electronic Trailer Sway Control is integrated into the
StabiliTrak system of the vehicle. This feature detects
the occurrence of trailer sway that may be caused by
improper trailer weight balance, or excessive vehicle
speed. When the system detects trailer sway, the
StabiliTrak system may begin to apply the front
brakes, without you pressing the brake pedal, to help in
stabilizing the vehicle. The StabiliTrak warning light will
flash to indicate that vehicle speed should be reduced.
If the trailer continues to sway, StabiliTrak will reduce
engine torque as a method to reduce the speed of the
vehicle. Reducing the speed of the vehicle is necessary
to reduce trailer sway. Electronic Trailer Sway Control
is de-activated when StabiliTrak is turned off, and is
re-activated when it is turned back on. See StabiliTrak®
System on page 4-6.
Backing Up
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations that require heavy
braking and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Passing
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
4-39
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the
trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the vehicle
is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument panel
flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned
out. For this reason you may think other drivers are
seeing the signal when they are not. It is important to
check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce the
vehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating.
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to
a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
4-40
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If the engine is
turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, the vehicle may show signs similar to
engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run while
parked, preferably on level ground, with the automatic
transmission in P (Park) for a few minutes before turning
the engine off. If the overheat warning comes on, see
Engine Overheating on page 5-28.
Parking on Hills
{ CAUTION:
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer attached
can be dangerous. If something goes wrong, the rig
could start to move. People can be injured, and
both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.
When possible, always park the rig on a flat
surface.
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling
a trailer. See this manual’s Maintenance Schedule or
Index for more information. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system
and brake system. It is a good idea to inspect
these before and during the trip.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift into P (Park).
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
5. Release the brake pedal.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-28.
• Start the engine
• Shift into a gear
• Release the parking brake
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
4-41
✍ NOTES
4-42
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-4
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the
Vehicle ......................................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-15
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-18
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-19
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-21
Cooling System ............................................5-22
Engine Coolant .............................................5-23
Engine Overheating .......................................5-28
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ........................................5-30
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-30
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-31
Brakes ........................................................5-32
Battery ........................................................5-35
Jump Starting ...............................................5-36
All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-41
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-43
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-44
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-44
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps ....................................5-44
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps .........................................5-47
License Plate Lamp ......................................5-48
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-49
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-49
Tires ..............................................................5-51
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-52
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-55
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-58
High-Speed Operation ...................................5-60
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-61
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-62
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-66
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-67
Buying New Tires .........................................5-68
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-70
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-71
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-72
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-72
Tire Chains ..................................................5-74
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-75
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-76
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-77
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................5-79
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-85
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-87
Appearance Care ............................................5-88
Interior Cleaning ...........................................5-88
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-89
Leather .......................................................5-90
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ........................................5-90
5-2
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-91
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-91
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-91
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-92
Finish Care ..................................................5-92
Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-93
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels and Trim ....5-94
Tires ...........................................................5-94
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-95
Finish Damage .............................................5-95
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-95
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-95
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-96
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-96
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-96
Electrical System ............................................5-96
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-96
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-97
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-97
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..........................5-97
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ....................5-99
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-103
Service
Accessories and Modifications
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,
traction control, and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/retailer
and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-68.
5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including
some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some
component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium
batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{ CAUTION:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order
the proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-17.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-68.
5-4
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the
mileage and the date of any service work performed.
See Maintenance Record on page 6-17.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment
to the outside of the vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,
we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) on page 5-96.
Gasoline Octane
If the vehicle has the 3.4L V6 engine (VIN Code F),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs
service.
If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VIN Code 7),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. For best performance or trailer
towing, you could choose to use middle grade 89 octane
unleaded gasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs
service.
5-5
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in
Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-6 for
additional information.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-34. If this occurs, return to your
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
5-6
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is
the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Filling the Tank
{ CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
5-8
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the passenger side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
{ CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-91.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-34.
{ CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the
right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage the fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-34.
5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{ CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
5-10
{ CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
{ CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located inside the
vehicle, to the left of
the brake pedal.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up on the
secondary hood release lever.
3. Lift the hood, release the hood prop from its retainer
and put the hood prop into the slot in the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the
hood and return the prop to its retainer. Then just let the
hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 3.4L V6, here is what you will see:
5-12
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19.
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
D. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes on page 5-32.
E. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-97.
F. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-36.
G. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-23.
H. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-31.
5-13
When you open the hood on the 3.6L V6, here is what you will see:
5-14
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19.
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Out of View).
See Power Steering Fluid on page 5-30.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out of View). See “When to Add
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
E. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
Brakes on page 5-32.
F. Underhood Fuse Block. See Engine Compartment
Fuse Block on page 5-99.
G. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-36.
H. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 5-22.
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-31.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-15
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip
of the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind
of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,
see Capacities and Specifications on page 5-103.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
5-16
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine
oil fill cap.
SAE 5W-30 may not
appear on all caps.
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range in the cross-hatched area. Push the
dipstick all the way back in when through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on the
container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Cold Temperature Operation
• GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls
below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic
oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide easier cold
starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures.
Always use an oil that meets the required specification,
GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine Oil to Use” for
more information.
5-17
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when
to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system must
be reset every time the oil is changed.
5-18
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A change engine oil light and a CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message come on. Change the oil as soon as
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is
possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the oil
life system might not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at this
time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
trained service people who will perform this work using
genuine parts and reset the system. It is also important to
check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where the oil is changed prior to a change engine oil light
or CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message being turned
on, reset the system.
Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal
three times within five seconds.
The change engine oil light will flash while the
system is resetting.
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
3. When the light stops flashing, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF.
If the light or message comes back on and stays on
when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
5-19
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust
and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter is
required.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
1. Turn off the engine.
4. Remove the air outlet duct.
5. Undo the clamps on the filter cover. To remove the
cover, pull up on the front and then pull the cover out.
6. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
Wipe all dust from inside of the housing and
inspect the air cleaner and air outlet duct for cracks,
cuts, and deterioration. The air outlet duct must
be replaced if damaged.
7. Reinstall the filter cover and latch the clamps.
2. Disconnect the air flow sensor electrical connector.
3. Loosen the screws on the clamps holding the air
outlet duct in place. Do not pry the clamps off.
5-20
8. Reattach the air outlet duct and tighten the screws
on the clamps that hold the duct in place.
9. Reconnect the air flow sensor electrical connector.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
{ CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into the engine, which will damage it. Always have
the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to the dealer/retailer
and have it repaired as soon as possible.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 6-7, and be sure
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may
not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
For the 3.6L engine, the transmission fluid will not
reach the end of the dipstick unless the transmission
is at operating temperature. If you need to check the
transmission fluid level, please take your vehicle to
your dealer/retailer.
5-21
Cooling System
The Cooling System allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
{ CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you
can be burned.
CAUTION:
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
B. Coolant Surge Tank
5-22
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in
the vehicle.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling system and how
to check and add coolant when it is low. If there
is a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 5-28.
5-23
What to Use
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
{ CAUTION:
• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get
too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
5-24
outside temperature.
engine temperature.
• Protects against rust and corrosion.
• Will not damage aluminum parts.
• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could
be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-13 for more information.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or
above the COLD FILL mark, add a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at
the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system
is cool before this is done.
The surge tank is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.
When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be
at the COLD FILL line. When your engine is warm,
the level should be at the COLD FILL line or a
little higher.
The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line.
If it is not, you may have a leak in the cooling system.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
5-25
How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
5-26
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge
tank pressure cap — even a little — they can
come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when
the cooling system, including the coolant surge
tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
system and coolant surge tank pressure cap to
cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant surge tank.
1. You can remove the
coolant surge tank
pressure cap when
the cooling system,
including the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one-quarter of a turn. If you hear a hiss,
wait for that to stop. This will allow any pressure
still left to be vented out the discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture, to the
COLD FILL line.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the
COLD FILL line.
5-27
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight.
6. After driving the vehicle, check the level in the
surge tank again when the cooling system has
cooled down.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
If the coolant is not at the proper level, repeat
Steps 1 through 3 and reinstall the pressure cap.
If the coolant is not at the proper level when the
system cools down again, see your dealer/retailer.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be running.
If they are not, do not continue to run the engine and
have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine
overheating.
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle’s
instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gage on page 3-33. There are also several different
types of engine overheating messages that may be
displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-49.
5-28
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving
with no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 5-30 for information on
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
{ CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign
of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it
overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
on page 5-30 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
Stops after high-speed driving.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
Tows a trailer.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
steam:
1. Turn the air conditioner off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. If in a traffic jam, try to minimize engine load. Shift
to N (Neutral); otherwise, shift to the highest gear
while driving.
5-29
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays,
the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the vehicle
slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle distance
from the car in front of you. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the
cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oil
life system. See Engine Oil on page 5-15.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
Power Steering Fluid
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for three
minutes while parked. If the warning is still displayed, turn
off the engine until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” later in this section.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
reservoir location.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode lets the vehicle
be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.
If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this
mode, there is a significant loss in power and engine
performance. The temperature gage indicates an
overheat condition exists. Driving extended distances
and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode
should be avoided.
5-30
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power steering fluid is used in all vehicles with the
3.6L V6 engine. Vehicles with the 3.4L V6 engine
have electric power steering and do not use power
steering fluid.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
What to Use
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
the vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-13.
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
The fluid level should be between the Min (Minimum)
and Max (Maximum) marks when the engine is cold,
and at the Max mark when the engine is hot. If the fluid
is at the Min mark when the engine is cold or hot,
power steering fluid should be added.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Always use the proper fluid.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield or rear window washer fluid
be sure to read the instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
5-31
Adding Windshield Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with DOT
3 brake fluid. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for the location
of the reservoir.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
5-32
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
• The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.
• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes will not work well.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are worn,
there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only
when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{ CAUTION:
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on
the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough.
You or others could be burned, and the vehicle
could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-30.
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
{ CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-91.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt
from entering the reservoir.
5-33
Brake Wear
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying
the brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to torque specifications in Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-103.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
{ CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is
heard, have the vehicle serviced.
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not return
to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign that brake service might be
required.
Brake Adjustment
Every time the brakes are applied, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
5-34
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change in
many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts
are installed.
Battery
This vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for one
that has the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label.
For battery replacement, see your dealer/retailer or the
service manual. To purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-17.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
{ CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-36 for tips
on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This helps keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or
use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain the
charge of the battery over an extended period of time.
All doors and the liftgate must be closed before
reconnecting the battery. After reconnecting the
battery, press the unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter. Failure to follow this procedure could result
in the alarm sounding. Pressing unlock on the keyless
access transmitter will stop the alarm.
5-35
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{ CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered
by the warranty.
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
5-36
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be
able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put an
automatic transmission in P (PARK) or a manual
transmission in N (Neutral) before setting the
parking brake.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off the
radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save your radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations on each vehicle.
You will not need to access your battery for jump
starting. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) and
a remote negative (−) jump starting terminal for
that purpose.
5. To remove the fuse block cover, push in the two
locking tabs located on the rear of the cover, and lift.
To reinstall, fit together the tabs located on the front
of the cover and push down on the cover until the
tabs on the rear of the cover, click into place.
3.4L V6 Engine
The remote positive (+) terminal is located under
the engine compartment fuse block cover, and
is marked with a plus (+) symbol on the cover.
5-37
{ CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
{ CAUTION:
3.6L V6 Engine
The remote negative (−) terminal is located in the
front of the engine compartment, near the engine oil
dipstick.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on the location of the remote
positive (+) terminal and the engine oil dipstick.
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do not,
explosive gas could be present.
CAUTION:
5-38
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
{ CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
6. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged, too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will
go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts, too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
7. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
9. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
10. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) terminal
for this purpose.
5-39
11. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
12. Press the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter to disarm your content
theft-deterrent system.
13. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct order,
making sure that the cables do not touch each other
or other metal.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-40
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit)
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4.
How to Check Lubricant
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the fuse block cover to its original position.
All-Wheel Drive
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure to
perform the lubricant checks described in this section.
However, there are two additional systems that
need lubrication.
PTU for 3.4L V6 Model
5-41
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Carrier Assembly-Differential
(Rear Drive Module)
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it.
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
PTU for 3.6L V6 Model
A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case.
5-42
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
AWD Differential Case for 3.4L and 3.6L V6 Models
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you’ll
need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to
raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. A fluid
loss could indicate a problem; check and have it repaired,
if needed.
5-43
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-49.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.
Halogen Bulbs
{ CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions on the bulb package.
2. Carefully pry out the center of the push pins from
the top of the radiator cover.
5-44
3. Gently pull the radiator
cover/front grill toward
you and pull the front
grill trim bar away from
the headlamp lens.
The front grill bar is attached to the headlamp lens
with a hidden clip.
4. Remove the three headlamp assembly attachment
screws.
5. Pull the radiator cover/front grill toward you and pull
the headlamp assembly up and out from the vehicle.
5-45
6. Press the clip (A) on
the electrical connector
when replacing the
low-beam or high-beam
bulb, then pull it
straight off.
A. Parking Lamp
B. Sidemarker Lamp
C. Low/High-Beam
Headlamp
D. Turn Signal Lamp
Turn the bulb retaining ring (B) counterclockwise
to remove it and then pull the bulb assembly
straight out.
For all other bulbs, turn the socket counterclockwise
and pull it out from the headlamp assembly. Pull the
bulb straight out from the socket.
7. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
socket into the headlamp assembly by turning it
clockwise.
For the low-beam or high-beam bulb, install the new
bulb being sure to align the notches in the bulb
with the notches in the headlamp assembly.
5-46
8. Place the retaining ring over the bulb/socket and
turn it clockwise to tighten it and secure the
bulb/socket.
9. Connect the electrical connector.
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to reinstall the headlamp
assembly.
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 2-12.
2. Remove the taillamp
screw covers and
then remove the
two screws.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
A. Turn Signal
Lamp/Taillamp
B. Stoplamp/Taillamp
C. Sidemarker Lamp
D. Back-Up Lamp
3. Carefully slide the
taillamp assembly
outward to clear the
stud (see arrow)
and then straight back
and away from the
body of the vehicle.
5-47
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the taillamp assembly.
License Plate Lamp
5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
To replace one of these bulbs:
6. Push the new bulb straight into the bulb socket.
7. Push the bulb socket into the taillamp housing and
turn it clockwise to secure.
1. Remove the two screws holding each of the license
plate lamps to the liftgate handle.
8. Carefully push the taillamp assembly back into the
body of the vehicle and then carefully slide the
taillamp assembly inward to reengage the stud.
9. Reinstall the two screws that hold the taillamp
assembly in the body of the vehicle.
10. Reinstall the two taillamp screw covers.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp down through
the liftgate opening.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Push the new bulb in and turn clockwise to lock into
place.
5-48
5. Push and turn the license plate lamp up through
the liftgate opening.
6. Reinstall the two screws holding the license plate
lamp to the liftgate handle.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-Up Lamp
Front Parking Lamp
Front Sidemarker Lamp
Front Turn Signal Lamp
License Plate Lamp
Low/High-Beam Lamp
Rear Sidemarker Lamp
Rear Turn Signal Lamp/Taillamp
Stoplamp/Taillamp
Bulb Number
921
194 N/A
168
1156 N/A
9421330
9007
W5W
1157
1157
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-15.
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly:
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
5-49
To replace the rear window wiper blade:
1. Lift the wiper blade arm straight toward you.
2. Push the blade release button and slide the whole
blade to the right to remove.
3. Install the new blade.
4. Push the wiper blade arm back into place.
2. Push the release lever (B) to disengage the hook
and push the wiper arm (A) out of the blade (C).
3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper
arm until you hear the release lever click into
place.
5-50
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details. For additional information refer
to the tire manufacturer.
{ CAUTION:
• Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
flexing. You could have an air-out and
a serious accident. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 4-21.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be
checked when your tires are cold. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
See High-Speed Operation on page 5-60 for
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
driving.
5-51
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
5-52
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of
the tire, although only one side may have the date
of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number
of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-71.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact
spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If your
vehicle has a compact spare tire, see Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-87 and If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 5-75.
5-53
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-58.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect
ratio, construction type, and service description.
The letter T as the first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary use only.
5-54
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60,
as shown in item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as
high as it is wide.
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to
carry a load.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be
made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to
the centerline of the tread.
5-55
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-58.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and date
of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-21.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-21.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
rear axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-21.
5-56
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on
page 4-21.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side
that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper
than the same moldings on the other sidewall of
the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-58 and Loading the Vehicle
on page 4-21.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 5-67.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 5-71.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
the Vehicle on page 4-21.
5-57
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading
Information Label” under Loading the Vehicle on
page 4-21.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
5-58
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the Tire and Loading Information label,
see Loading the Vehicle on page 4-21. How you
load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and
ride comfort. Never load your vehicle with more
weight than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-87.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended pressure on
the Tire and Loading Information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is
low, add air until you reach the recommended
amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
5-59
High-Speed Operation
{ CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustained
high-speed driving causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure. You could have
a crash and you or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure
adjustment for high speed operation. When speed
limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires
are rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire inflation
pressure for the vehicle load.
5-60
If your vehicle has P235/50R18 size tires, they will
require inflation pressure adjustment when driving your
vehicle at speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher.
Set the cold inflation pressure to the maximum inflation
pressure shown on the tire sidewall, or 35 psi (241 kPa),
whichever is lower. See the example following. When you
end this high-speed driving, return the tires to the cold
tire inflation pressure shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-21
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near
the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure for
high-speed driving at 35 psi (241 kPa).
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-62 for
additional information.
5-61
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science
Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Vehicles with TPMS operate on a radio frequency and
comply with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when
a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding
the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires and
transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver located
in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the low
tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
5-62
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the
DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle
until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by the
driver. For additional information and details about the
DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and
Displays on page 3-42 and DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-49.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn off
as you start to drive. This could be an early indicator that
the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting low and need to
be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to
your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your
vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 4-21, for an example of the Tire and
Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle.
Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-66 and Tires on page 5-51.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not covered
by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire sealants.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the
problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can
cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come
on are:
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the
road tire containing the TPMS sensor.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started but
not completed or not completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and
TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process is performed successfully.
See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this
section.
5-63
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. See Buying New Tires on page 5-68.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal a
low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service if
the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.
5-64
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. Any
time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or more
of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes will need to
be matched to the new tire/wheel position. The sensors
are matched to the tire/wheel positions in the following
order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire,
passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire using a
TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire/
wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s air
pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the
tire’s sidewall.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes, to
match the first tire and wheel, or more than five minutes
to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching
process stops and you need to start over.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s
lock and unlock buttons at the same time for
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice
to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE
LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC
screen.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to
indicate the sensor identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS
sensor matching process is no longer active.
The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC
display screen goes off.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which may take up to 30 seconds to sound,
confirms that the sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and wheel position.
5-65
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 5-67 for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will
ensure that your vehicle continues to perform most
like it did when the tires were new.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See When
It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-67 and Wheel
Replacement on page 5-72.
5-66
When rotating the vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire
rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-58 and Loading the Vehicle on
page 4-21.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-62.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-103.
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,
if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
influence when you need new tires.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which appear
when your tires have only
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less
of tread remaining. Some
commercial truck tires may
not have treadwear
indicators.
5-67
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear
out before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get
older, consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
5-68
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed
to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that
you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This
way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same performance and vehicle
safety, during normal use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake
system performance, ride and handling, traction
control, and tire pressure monitoring performance.
GM’s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire’s
sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an
all-season tread design, the TPC Spec number will
be followed by an MS for mud and snow. See Tire
Sidewall Labeling on page 5-52 for additional
information.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.
This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will
help keep your vehicle performing most like it did
when the tires were new. Replacing less than a full
set of tires can affect the braking and handling
performance of your vehicle. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 5-66 for information on
proper tire rotation.
{ CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types (radial and bias-belted
tires), the vehicle may not handle properly,
and you could have a crash. Using tires of
different sizes, brands, or types may also
cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
use the correct size, brand, and type of tires
on all wheels. It is all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, as it was
developed for use on your vehicle.
See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-87.
{ CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use
only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the
vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size, load range, speed
rating, and construction type (radial and
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system could give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on
your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a
low-pressure warning that is higher or lower than
the proper warning level you would get with TPC
Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-61.
5-69
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-21, for more
information about the Tire and Loading Information
Label and its location on your vehicle.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this could affect
the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride
and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance to
rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as anti-lock brakes, rollover airbags,
traction control, and electronic stability control, the
performance of these systems can be affected.
5-70
{ CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may
not provide an acceptable level of performance and
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase the chance that you
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 5-68 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform to
federal safety requirements and additional General
Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
5-71
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law. It should be noted that
the temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires
and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
5-72
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have
the right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS
sensors for your vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76 for more
information.
(Continued)
5-73
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how far
it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel,
use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without
the proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could
cause you to lose control of the vehicle and you or
others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on the
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.
To help avoid damage to the vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust or remove the device if it is contacting
the vehicle, and do not spin the vehicle’s wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
5-74
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would use
in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{ CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-75
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
CAUTION:
5-76
(Continued)
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire, on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
If your vehicle has the rear compartment storage
panel/cover, you will have to remove it to access the
load floor. See Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover
on page 2-45 for more information.
To access the spare tire and tools:
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
1. Lift the load floor up and pull it out of the vehicle
and set it aside.
5-77
5. Remove the wing-bolt
holding the jack and
then remove it.
6. Remove the hook and loop fastener straps holding
the bag containing the wheel wrench. Remove the
wheel wrench from the bag.
2. Remove the nut retaining the spare tire.
3. Remove the compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-87 for more information.
4. Locate the jack and wheel wrench, which are
located on the driver’s side of the rear cargo
area, behind an access door. Pull out the access
door to reach them.
5-78
7. Extend the socket portion of the wrench from the
handle.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Take off the wheel cover or center cap, if the vehicle
has one, to reach the wheel bolts.
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76 for more
information.
2. Loosen all five plastic
caps by turning the wheel
wrench counterclockwise.
Do not try to remove
plastic caps from the
cover or center cap.
5. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack bolt head and
turn the wheel wrench clockwise. That will raise the
lift head a little.
6. Place the jack near the flat tire.
Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is in the
correct position or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
3. Pull the cover or center cap away from the wheel.
Store the wheel cover in the cargo area until you
have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
4. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Do not remove them yet.
5-79
7. Find the arrow on the plastic lower body panel.
Position the jack head under the metal jacking
flange and not the plastic lower body panel.
With the jack head positioned correctly on the metal
jacking flange, it should look like this underneath
the vehicle.
Do not lift the vehicle using the plastic lower body
panel.
8. Put the compact spare tire near you.
{ CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
5-80
{ CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and
vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into
the proper location before raising the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
9. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the road tire to
clear the ground.
5-81
10. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is
fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after
time. The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust
or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76.
11. Remove the flat tire.
12. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
5-82
13. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
{ CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
14. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Tighten each nut by hand
until the wheel is held against the hub.
15. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise.
5-83
{ CAUTION:
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened with a
torque wrench to the proper torque specification
after replacing. Follow the torque specification
supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel nuts. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-103 for original
equipment wheel nut torque specifications.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
specification. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-103 for the wheel nut torque specification.
16. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
17. Lower the jack all the way and remove the jack
from under the vehicle.
18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly with the wheel
wrench.
When reinstalling the wheel cover or center cap on the
full-size tire, tighten all five plastic caps hand snug with
the aid of the wheel wrench and tighten them with the
wheel wrench an additional one-quarter of a turn.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’s
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or the spare could be
damaged.
5-84
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
3. Install the jack in the
left side panel of cargo
area and secure
with the wing bolt.
{ CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
4. Remove the wheel stow rod from the left side of the
floor compartment.
To store the flat or spare tire and tools:
1. Place the wheel wrench into the bag.
2. Use the hook and loop fastener straps to secure
the bag to the fully collapsed jack.
5-85
6. Remove the cap, if your vehicle has one, from the
center of the load floor. Position the rod through the
hole. Replace the rear compartment load floor over
the wheel stow rod through the hole in the floor.
7. Place the flat, or damaged tire, face down, on the
load floor with the threaded wheel stow rod sticking
up through the center hole of the wheel.
8. Install the nut onto the wheel stow rod and tighten.
9. Install the rear compartment storage panel/cover
in the middle position. See Rear Compartment
Storage Panel/Cover on page 2-45 for more
information.
5. Screw the threaded wheel stow rod onto the spare
tire bracket. The final position of the wheel stow rod
must be turned to the farthest forward position.
5-86
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon
as you can.
Compact Spare Tire
{ CAUTION:
Driving with more than one compact spare tire at a
time could result in loss of braking and handling.
This could lead to a crash and you or others could
be injured. Use only one compact spare tire at
a time.
3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip
and have the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your
convenience. Of course, it is best to replace the spare
with a full-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tire will
last longer and be in good shape in case it is needed
again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do not
take the vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the
rails which can damage the tire, wheel and other
parts of the vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check
the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi
(420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop as
soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctly
inflated. The compact spare is made to perform well at
speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with other
wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the spare tire and
its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.
Using them can damage the vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Do not use tire chains on the compact
spare.
5-87
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the
upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from
becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be
removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains
to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer
color to the vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
5-88
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s
doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s upholstery
and clean the vehicle’s glass can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops
per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle’s interior.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil,
always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-89
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small
hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleaned
area gives any impression that a ring formation may
result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a soft
cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used.
Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters
or spot removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect leather may permanently change the appearance
and feel of the leather and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
5-90
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean
soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters
or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of the interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to
clean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
{ CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that
it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it
on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
5-91
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than
12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-91.
5-92
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from
your dealer/retailer.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on
painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking
new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever
possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or
caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed
to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
•
•
•
•
Extreme dusty conditions
Sand and salt
Heat and sun
Snow and ice, without proper removal
5-93
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because they could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome
polish on chrome wheels only.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving
on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium,
calcium or sodium chloride. These chlorides are
used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust.
Always wash the vehicle’s chrome with soap and
water after exposure.
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
5-94
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic car
wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes,
could damage the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Never drive a vehicle that has
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through an
automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces
on the vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your
dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system can
do this.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-95
Vehicle Identification
Service Parts Identification Label
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is
very helpful if parts need to be ordered. The label has
the following information:
•
•
•
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for the vehicle. It appears on a
plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield
from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and
the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications,
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-103 for
the vehicle’s engine code.
5-96
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
the vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-68.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the
passenger side of the center console, to the left of the
glove box near the floor.
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly
reduces the chance of circuit overload and fire caused
by electrical problems.
The vehicle has an underhood fuse block and an
instrument panel fuse block.
To identify and check fuses, circuit breakers, and relays,
refer to the Fuse Usage Chart on the inside surface
of the fuse panel door.
Remove the console cover to access the fuse block.
5-97
Fuses
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Fuses
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5-98
Usage
Sunroof, Inside Rear View Mirror,
Compass
Rear Seat Entertainment
Rear Wiper
Liftgate
Airbags
Heated Seats
Driver Side Turn Signal
Door Locks
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Usage
Automatic Occupant Sensing
Module
Power Mirrors
Passenger Side Turn Signal
Amplifier
Steering Wheel Illumination
Infotainment
Climate Control System,
Remote Function Actuator
Canister Vent
Radio
Cluster
Ignition Switch
Body Control Module
Communications Integration Module
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp,
Dimmer
Interior Lights
Relays
Usage
RAP RLY
Retained Accessory Power Relay
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger Relay
RLY
Circuit
Breakers
PWR WNDW
PWR SEATS
EMPTY
Usage
Power Windows
Power Seats
Empty
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
To remove the fuse block cover, release the rear of
the cover first, by unlocking both of the tabs in the back.
Then lift the cover off. Do not lift the front of the cover until
the tabs at the rear have been unlocked. To reinstall, fit
together the tabs located on the front of the cover, and
push down on the cover until the tabs on the rear of the
cover click into place.
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver side of the engine compartment.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
5-99
Fuses
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
5-100
Usage
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 1
Auxiliary Power
Rear HVAC
Spare
Sun Roof
Antilock Brake System
Air Conditioning Clutch
Driver Side Low-Beam
Daytime Running Lamp 2
Passenger Side High-Beam
Passenger Side Park Lamp
Horn
Driver Side Park Lamp
Starter
Electronic Throttle Control,
Engine Control Module
Emission Device 1
Even Coils, Injectors
Odd Coils, Injectors
Emission Device 2
Spare
Powertrain Control Module, Ignition
Transmission
Fuses
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Usage
Mass Airflow Sensor
Airbag Display
Spare
Stoplamp
Passenger Side Low-Beam
Driver Side High-Beam
Battery Main 3
Spare
Engine Control Module, Battery
Transmission Control Module,
Battery
Trailer Park Lamp
Front Wiper
Driver Side Trailer Stoplamp,
Turn Signal
Spare
Fuel Pump
Fuses
40
41
42
43
44
45
48
49
50
52
53
54
57
63
Usage
Not Used
All-Wheel Drive
Regulated Voltage Control
Passenger Side Trailer Stoplamp,
Turn Signal
Spare
Front, Rear Washer
Rear Defogger
Antilock Brake System Motor
Battery Main 2
Daytime Running Lamps
Fog Lamps
Climate Control System Blower
Battery Main 1
Electric Power Steering
5-101
Relays
51
55
56
58
59
When changing relays, observe the location of the
notch on the old relay. Install new relays with the notch
in the same location.
Relays
31
46
47
5-102
Usage
Ignition Main
Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch
Powertrain
60
61
62
Misc.
PLR
Usage
Spare
Crank
Fan 1
Passenger Side Trailer Stoplamp,
Turn Signal
Driver Side Trailer Stoplamp,
Turn Signal
Fan 3
Fan 2
Fuel Pump
Usage
Fuse Puller
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-13 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer for more
information.
Cooling System
3.4L V6 Engine
10.5 qt
9.9 L
3.6L V6 Engine
11.0 qt
10.4 L
3.4L V6 Engine
4.5 qt
4.3 L
3.6L V6 Engine
5.5 qt
5.2 L
Engine Oil with Filter
5-103
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Front-Wheel Drive
20.5 gal
77.6 L
All-Wheel Drive
16.6 gal
62.8 L
Automatic 5-Speed AF33 Transmission
4.1 qt
3.9 L
Automatic 6-Speed 6T70 Transmission
9.5 qt
9.0 L
100 lb ft
140 Y
Fuel Tank
Transmission Fluid
Wheel Nut Torque
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
3.4L V6
F
Automatic
0.060 in (1.52 mm)
3.6L V6
7
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
5-104
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-7
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-8
Owner Checks and Services ..........................6-10
At Each Fuel Fill ..........................................6-10
At Least Once a Month .................................6-11
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-11
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-13
Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................6-15
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-16
Maintenance Record .....................................6-17
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
the vehicle in good working condition, but also helps
the environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from the vehicle. To help protect the environment, and to
keep the vehicle in good condition, be sure to maintain
the vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty
and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer for
details.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep this vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
6-2
We want to help keep this vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive
it. You might drive very short distances only a few times a
week. Or you might drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You might use the vehicle in
making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work, to do
errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-21.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-7 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-8 for further information.
{ CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 5-4.
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, have your dealer/retailer
do these jobs.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine parts.
To purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-17.
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-10 tells what
should be checked, when to check it, and what can easily
be done to help keep the vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13 and Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 6-15. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
6-3
Scheduled Maintenance
When the change engine oil light and/or CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message displays, service is
required for the vehicle. Have the vehicle serviced as
soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions,
the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle
service is necessary for over a year. However, the engine
oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
has trained service technicians who will perform this work
using genuine parts and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since
the last service. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System
on page 5-18 for information on the Engine Oil Life
System and resetting the system.
6-4
When the change engine oil light and/or CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message appears, certain services,
checks, and inspections are required. Required services
are described in the following for “Maintenance I” and
“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommended that the
first service be Maintenance I, the second service be
Maintenance II, and then alternate Maintenance I and
Maintenance II thereafter. However, in some cases,
Maintenance II may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the light/
message displays within 10 months since the vehicle
was purchased or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the light/message displays
10 months or more since the last service or if the light/
message has not come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-15. Reset oil life system.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18. An Emission Control Service.
Service
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19. See footnote (l).
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 5-66 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on
page 6-11.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant, power steering fluid (3.6L V6 engine only), and windshield
washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
•
•
6-5
Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g).
•
3.6L V6 Engine Only: Check automatic transmission fluid level and add fluid as
needed.
•
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j).
•
6-6
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19.
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
(severe service). See footnote (h).
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
(normal service).
Change transfer case fluid (severe
service). See footnote (n).
•
•
•
•
Change transfer case fluid (normal
service). See footnote (o).
•
•
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control Service.
•
6-7
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (m).
•
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc
brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition.
Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, parking
brake, etc. Check parking brake adjustment.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts
or signs of wear. Visually check constant velocity
joints, rubber boots, and axle seals for leaks. With
3.4L V6 engine: Inspect electric power steering cables
for proper hook-up, binding, cracks, chafing, etc.
With 3.6L V6 engine: Inspect hydraulic power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc.
6-8
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, if
contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or
damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on
page 5-49 and Windshield and Wiper Blades on
page 5-93 for more information.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety
belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint Systems
on page 1-70.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assemblies,
secondary latches, pivots, spring anchor and release
pawl, hood and door hinges, rear folding seats, and
liftgate hinges. More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will
make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or
squeak.
(g) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid if the vehicle is
mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service can
be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer perform
this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-23 for what to
use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
pressure cap.
(j) Check system for interference or binding and for
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear.
6-9
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(l) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect the
filter at each engine oil change.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
(n) Severe service is when the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
(o) Change the fluid the first time the vehicle is serviced
after 100,000 miles (166 000 km) and when the
vehicle is serviced after each subsequent 50,000 miles
(83 000 km).
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety,
dependability, and emission control performance. Your
dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-15.
6-10
Engine Coolant Level Check
At Least Once a Year
®
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-23.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
Starter Switch Check
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they are inflated
to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check the
spare tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58.
Check to make sure the spare tire is stored securely.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-31.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-66.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
6-11
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-31.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
6-12
when the shift lever is in P (Park).
• The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should
the vehicle begin to move.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill.
Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking
brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the
engine running and the transmission in N (Neutral),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Engine Oil
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on page 5-15.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
®
Engine Coolant water and use only DEX-COOL
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-23.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
Hydraulic Brake (GM Part No. U.S. 12377967,
System
in Canada 89021320).
6-13
Usage
Windshield
Washer
Hydraulic
Power Steering
System (3.6L
V6 engine only)
5-speed
Automatic
Transmission
(3.4L
V6 engine only)
6-speed
Automatic
Transmission
(3.6L V6
engine only)
Key Lock
Cylinders
Carrier
Assembly —
Differential
(Rear Drive
Module)
6-14
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
®
Optikleen Washer Solvent.
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
Use only T-IV Automatic
Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 88900925,
in Canada 22689186).
See Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 5-21.
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678).
Transfer Case
(Power
Transfer Unit)
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor,
and
Release Pawl
Hood and Door
Hinges, Rear
Folding Seat
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Fluid/Lubricant
With 3.4L V6 engine: VERSATRAK®
Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12378514,
in Canada 88901045).
With 3.6L V6 engine: SAE 75W-90
Synthetic Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
22676970
A1627C
3.4L V6 Engine
25010792
PF47
3.6L V6 Engine
89017524
PF48
15781507
CF137
3.4L V6 Engine
12568387
41-101
3.6L V6 Engine
12597464
41-990
Front Driver Side – 24 in (60.0 cm)
22703508
—
Front Passenger Side – 19 in (47.5 cm)
22703507
—
Rear – 15.2 in (38.6 cm)
19120327
—
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
Wiper Blades
6-15
Engine Drive Belt Routing
3.6L V6 Engine
3.4L V6 Engine
6-16
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-10 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-19
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-20
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-5
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY) Users .........................7-6
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-7
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-7
Scheduling Service Appointments ....................7-11
Courtesy Transportation Program ....................7-11
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-13
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..........................7-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ................................7-16
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-16
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-17
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-18
Event Data Recorders ...................................7-18
OnStar® ......................................................7-19
Navigation System ........................................7-19
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..............7-19
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by the dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern
has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following
steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership or the general
manager.
7-2
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General Motors
of Canada Customer Communication Centre at
1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following
information available to give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest following Step One first.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if
you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage,
and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to
change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
7-3
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event
that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware
of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration
Program. General Motors of Canada Limited has
committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The
program provides for the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint to the final decision,
should be completed in about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of
charge.
7-4
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
• Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more
•
•
•
•
•
Online service and maintenance records
Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide
Exclusive privileges and offers
Recall notices for your specific vehicle
®
OnStar and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
Other Helpful Links:
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
• My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
and phone number for each of your preferred GM
dealers/retailers.
• My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
service estimates, check trade-in values, or
schedule a service appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
• My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter
• FAQ
• Contact Us
7-5
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can
communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV
(2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be
addressed to:
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
7-6
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY
users call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872); (Text telephone (TTY):
1-888-889-2438).
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
7-7
Calling for Assistance
Coverage
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km), whichever comes first.
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.
In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not covered.
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
7-8
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner
or driver if they decide the claims are made too often,
or the same type of claim is made many times.
Services Provided
• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may be
available if you have OnStar®. For security reasons,
the driver must present identification before this
service is given.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway:
Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer for warranty
service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot
be driven. Assistance is also given when the vehicle
is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and properly inflated.
It is the owner’s responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the
warranty.
• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your
trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental
expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain warranty
period. Items considered are hotel, meals, and
rental car.
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
• Legal fines.
• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
• Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
7-9
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted.
Propane and other fuels are not provided through
this service.
• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either with
the most direct route or the most scenic route. There
is a limit of six requests per year. Additional travel
information is also available. Allow three weeks for
delivery.
7-10
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was
started to qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited
requires pre-authorization, original detailed receipts,
and a copy of the repair orders. Once authorization
has been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help you make arrangements and explain how to
receive payment.
• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
Scheduling Service Appointments
Courtesy Transportation Program
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
To enhance your ownership experience, we and
our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain, and
hybrid specific warranty in both the U.S. and Canada.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
7-11
Transportation Options
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight warranty
repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited and must
be supported by original receipts. This requires that you
sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state/
provincial, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may
also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,
excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes one-way
or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time and
distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement
of fuel or other transportation costs.
7-12
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered by
appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,
have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using
the proper equipment and quality replacement parts.
Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your vehicle’s
resale value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Parts
Repair Facility
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety
are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
We recommend that you choose a collision repair facility
that meets your needs before you ever need collision
repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a collision repair
center with GM-trained technicians and state of the art
equipment, or be able to recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained technicians and comparable
equipment.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the
vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be
an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s originally
designed appearance and safety performance, however,
the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not
covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
any related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to
your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts.
7-13
When purchasing insurance, we recommend that you
assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is
not available from your current insurance carrier,
consider switching to another insurance carrier.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Check to make sure that you are all right. If you
are uninjured, make sure that no one else in your
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle
only if its position puts you in danger or you are
instructed to move it by a police officer.
7-14
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will
help guard against post-crash legal action.
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-7 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair.
If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take
your vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the
facility that any required replacement collision parts be
original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts or
recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts
will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation
based on that insurance company’s collision policy
repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with that
company. In such cases, you can have control of the
repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
7-15
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov; or
write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from safercar.gov.
7-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin
contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
7-17
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a
crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking to
help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may
store data to help your dealer/retailer technician service
your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about
how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel
consumption or average speed. These modules may also
retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio
pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
7-18
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
OnStar®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and use.
See also OnStar® System on page 2-39 in this manual
for more information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other GM
system containing personal information.
7-19
✍ NOTES
7-20
A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3
Accessory Power ............................................ 2-21
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-18
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................... 1-68
Additional Required Services,
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-7
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-96
Adjustments
Headlamp Range .......................................... 1-7
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-19
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-19
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment .................... 3-23
Airbag
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-28
Airbag System ................................................ 1-55
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................ 1-68
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-61
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-63
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-68
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-61
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ..... 1-62
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-60
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-58
Airbags
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-29
All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-41
All-Wheel Drive Disabled Light .......................... 3-39
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System ........................... 4-9
All-Wheel-Drive Service Light ............................ 3-39
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-5
Warning Light ............................................. 3-31
Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-94
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-91
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-95
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-92
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-89
Finish Care ................................................. 5-92
Finish Damage ............................................ 5-95
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-90
Interior Cleaning .......................................... 5-88
Leather ...................................................... 5-90
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-95
Tires .......................................................... 5-94
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-95
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-91
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-91
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-93
Ashtray ......................................................... 3-18
Assistance Program, Roadside ........................... 7-7
Audio System ................................................. 3-64
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-117
Navigation/Radio System,
see Navigation Manual .............................. 3-97
Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-65
1
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-67
Audio Systems
Radio Reception ........................................ 3-118
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-117
Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-14
Automatic Transmission
Fluid .......................................................... 5-21
Operation ........................................... 2-24, 2-27
B
Battery .......................................................... 5-35
Electric Power Management .......................... 3-17
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-17
Belt Routing, Engine ....................................... 6-16
Bluetooth® ..................................................... 3-97
Brake
Emergencies ................................................ 4-5
Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-32
Brakes .......................................................... 5-32
Antilock ....................................................... 4-5
Parking ...................................................... 2-31
System Warning Light .................................. 3-30
Braking ........................................................... 4-4
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-5
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-19
2
Bulb Replacement ...........................................
Fog Lamp ..................................................
Halogen Bulbs ............................................
Headlamp Aiming ........................................
Headlamps .................................................
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps ..................................
License Plate Lamps ....................................
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ........................................
Buying New Tires ...........................................
5-49
3-15
5-44
5-43
5-44
5-44
5-48
5-47
5-68
C
Calibration ..................................................... 3-47
California
Perchlorate Materials Requirements ................. 5-4
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-4
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-103
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust ........................................... 2-35
Liftgate ...................................................... 2-12
Winter Driving ............................................. 4-17
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-91
Cargo
Lamp .........................................................
Tie Downs ..................................................
CD, MP3 ............................................... 3-86,
Center Console Storage ...................................
Chains, Tire ...................................................
Charging System Light ....................................
Check
Engine Lamp ..............................................
Checking Things Under the Hood ......................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...................................
Child Restraints
Infants and Young Children ...........................
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..........
Older Children .............................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ...................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ..........................
Systems .....................................................
Where to Put the Restraint ...........................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Circuit Breakers ..............................................
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ..............
Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................................
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................
Finish Care .................................................
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces .......................................
Interior .......................................................
3-16
2-48
3-91
2-42
5-74
3-30
3-34
5-10
5-95
1-34
1-42
1-31
1-49
1-52
1-37
1-40
3-18
5-97
5-94
5-92
5-89
5-92
5-90
5-88
Cleaning (cont.)
Leather ...................................................... 5-90
Tires .......................................................... 5-94
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-95
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-91
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-91
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-93
Climate Control System ................................... 3-19
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-23
Clock, Setting ................................................. 3-65
Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-13
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-87
Compass ....................................................... 3-47
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-17
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-4
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-48
Coolant
Engine ....................................................... 5-23
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-33
Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-32
Cooling System .............................................. 5-22
Courtesy Transportation Program ...................... 7-11
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-38
Cupholders .................................................... 2-42
Customer Assistance ......................................... 7-6
Offices ......................................................... 7-6
Text Telephone (TTY) Users ........................... 7-6
Customer Information
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-17
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ........................ 7-2
3
D
Damage Repair, Collision ................................. 7-13
Data Recorders
Event ......................................................... 7-18
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ......................... 3-14
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Delayed Locking ............................................. 2-10
DIC Compass ................................................. 3-47
Disc, MP3 ............................................. 3-86, 3-91
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-16
Door
Ajar Light ................................................... 3-40
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-10
Locks ........................................................ 2-10
Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-11
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-11
Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 5-41
Driver
Seat Height Adjuster ...................................... 1-3
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-42
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-42
DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-57
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-49
4
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-14
Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-15
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunk .......................................................... 4-3
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-16
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-16
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-14
Loss of Control ........................................... 4-12
Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 4-12
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-21
Winter ........................................................ 4-17
Driving for Better Fuel Economy ......................... 4-2
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment System .................. 3-108
E
EDR .............................................................
Electrical Equipment
Add-On Equipment ......................................
Electrical System
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ...................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block .........................
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................
Electronic Immobilizer
PASS-Key® III+ ...........................................
7-18
5-96
5-99
5-97
5-97
5-97
2-17
Electronic Immobilizer Operation
PASS-Key® III+ ...........................................
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter .........................................
Change Engine Oil Light ...............................
Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp ...........
Compartment Overview ................................
Coolant ......................................................
Coolant Heater ............................................
Coolant Temperature Gage ...........................
Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................
Cooling System ...........................................
Drive Belt Routing .......................................
Exhaust .....................................................
Oil .............................................................
Oil Life System ...........................................
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ...........
Overheating ................................................
Reduced Power Light ...................................
Starting ......................................................
Entry Lighting .................................................
Event Data Recorders .....................................
Extender, Safety Belt .......................................
2-18
F
5-19
3-37
3-34
5-12
5-23
2-23
3-33
3-32
5-22
6-16
2-35
5-15
5-18
5-30
5-28
3-38
2-21
3-16
7-18
1-30
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-19
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-95
Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-75
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-76
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-85
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-21
Power Steering ........................................... 5-30
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-31
Fog Lamp
Fog ........................................................... 3-15
Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-37
Folding Rear Seat ........................................... 1-10
Folding Seatback, Passenger ............................. 1-8
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Economy Driving ........................................... 4-2
5
Fuel (cont.)
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling the Tank ............................................. 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-40
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................ 3-41
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................... 5-99
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-97
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-97
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-97
G
Gage
Speedometer .............................................. 3-26
Tachometer ................................................. 3-26
Gages
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-33
Fuel .......................................................... 3-40
Trip Odometer ............................................. 3-26
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-6
Gate Ajar Light ............................................... 3-40
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-42
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-7
6
H
Halogen Bulbs ................................................ 5-44
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-7
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-43
Headlamps .................................................... 3-13
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-44
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ..................... 3-14
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps .................................. 5-44
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
On Reminder .............................................. 3-13
Range Adjustment ......................................... 1-7
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4
Heater ........................................................... 3-19
Engine Coolant ........................................... 2-23
Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................... 1-3
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-38
High-Speed Operation, Tires ............................. 5-60
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-16
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-16
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-17
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-20
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-34
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-58
Instrument Panel
Brightness .................................................. 3-15
Cluster ....................................................... 3-25
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Introduction ...................................................... 6-2
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-36
K
Keyless Entry, Remote Operation ........................ 2-5
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall .....................................
Lamp
Malfunction Indicator ....................................
Lamps
Cargo ........................................................
Daytime Running (DRL) ................................
Dome ........................................................
License Plate ..............................................
Map ..........................................................
Lap-Shoulder Belt ...........................................
LATCH System for Child Restraints ...................
Liftgate
Carbon Monoxide ........................................
Lighting
Entry .........................................................
Lights ............................................................
Airbag Readiness ........................................
All-Wheel Drive Disabled ..............................
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning ............
5-52
3-34
3-16
3-14
3-16
5-48
3-16
1-25
1-42
2-12
3-16
3-13
3-28
3-39
3-31
7
Lights (cont.)
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-30
Change Engine Oil ...................................... 3-37
Charging System ......................................... 3-30
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-38
Door Ajar ................................................... 3-40
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 3-32
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
Fog Lamp .................................................. 3-37
Gate Ajar ................................................... 3-40
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-38
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-41
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-36
On Reminder .............................................. 3-13
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-29
Reduced Engine Power ................................ 3-38
Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-27
Security ..................................................... 3-37
Service All-Wheel-Drive ................................ 3-39
Service Vehicle Soon ................................... 3-40
Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-33
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-32
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-21
8
Locks
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-10
Door .......................................................... 2-10
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-12
Power Door ................................................ 2-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-11
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-11
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-12
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-41
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ............. 1-42
Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-43
Lumbar
Manual Controls ............................................ 1-4
M
Maintenance
Footnotes ..................................................... 6-8
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-7
At Each Fuel Fill ......................................... 6-10
At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-11
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-11
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-17
Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-15
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Owner Checks and Services ......................... 6-10
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-13
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using .......................................................... 6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................... 3-34
Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-4
Manual Reclining Seatbacks ............................... 1-5
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2
Map Lamps .................................................... 3-16
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-49
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 2-37
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-37
Outside Convex Mirrors ................................ 2-38
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-38
MP3 ..................................................... 3-86, 3-91
N
Navigation System, Privacy ..............................
Navigation/Radio System,
see Navigation Manual .................................
Net
Convenience ...............................................
New Vehicle Break-In ......................................
7-19
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-26
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-26
Off-Road
Recovery .................................................... 4-12
Oil
Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-37
Engine ....................................................... 5-15
Engine Oil Life System ................................. 5-18
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-36
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-31
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-5
OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-19
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-39
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-23
Outlets
Accessory Power ......................................... 3-18
Outside
Convex Mirrors ............................................ 2-38
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-38
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode .... 5-30
Owner Checks and Services ............................. 6-10
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
3-97
2-48
2-19
9
P
Paint, Damage ............................................... 5-95
Park
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-32
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-33
Parking
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-34
Parking Brake ................................................ 2-31
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-29
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-23
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-63
Passing ......................................................... 4-12
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............... 2-17
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation ................................................... 2-18
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California ...... 5-4
Phone
Bluetooth® .................................................. 3-97
Power
Door Locks ................................................. 2-10
Reduced Engine Light .................................. 3-38
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-21
Seat ............................................................ 1-3
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-30
Windows .................................................... 2-15
Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts .......................... 1-30
10
Privacy .......................................................... 7-18
Navigation System ....................................... 7-19
OnStar ....................................................... 7-19
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ............. 7-19
Program
Courtesy Transportation ................................ 7-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-11
Proposition 65 Warning, California ....................... 5-4
R
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), Privacy ..... 7-19
Radio(s) ........................................................ 3-67
Radios
Navigation/Radio System,
see Navigation Manual .............................. 3-97
Reception ................................................. 3-118
Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-65
Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-117
Range Adjustment, Headlamps ........................... 1-7
Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover ............ 2-45
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-11
Rear Seat Armrest .......................................... 2-47
Rear Seat Entertainment System ..................... 3-108
Rear Window Washer/Wiper ............................. 3-10
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming .................. 2-37
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-37
Reclining Seatbacks, Manual .............................. 1-5
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-13
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-27
Reduced Engine Power Light ............................ 3-38
Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility ................. 7-7
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System, Operation ... 2-5
Remote Vehicle Start ........................................ 2-7
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-79
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-77
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-49
Replacement Parts, Maintenance ...................... 6-15
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ....... 7-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .................................. 7-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the
U.S. Government ......................................... 7-16
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-70
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-71
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-21
Roadside Assistance Program ............................ 7-7
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-21
Roof
Sunroof ...................................................... 2-49
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................... 2-36
S
Safety Belt Reminders ..................................... 3-27
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 5-91
Extender .................................................... 1-30
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-17
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-25
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-12
Use During Pregnancy ................................. 1-30
Safety Defects
Reporting to Canadian Government ................ 7-16
Reporting to General Motors ......................... 7-16
Reporting to the U.S. Government ................. 7-16
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-7
Scheduling Appointments ................................. 7-11
Seatback, Folding Passenger ............................. 1-8
Seats
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ............................. 1-3
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4
Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-4
Manual Reclining Seatbacks ........................... 1-5
Passenger Folding Seatback ........................... 1-8
Power Seat .................................................. 1-3
Split Folding Rear Seat ................................ 1-10
11
Securing a Child Restraint
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-49
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-52
Security Light ................................................. 3-37
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5
All-Wheel-Drive Light .................................... 3-39
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Lamp ...................................... 3-34
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-17
Scheduling Appointments .............................. 7-11
Vehicle Soon Light ....................................... 3-40
Service Parts Identification Label ....................... 5-96
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-68
Setting the Clock ............................................ 3-65
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-95
Shifting
Out of Park ................................................ 2-33
Shifting Into Park ............................................ 2-32
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7
Spare Tire
Compact .................................................... 5-87
Installing .................................................... 5-79
Removing ................................................... 5-77
Storing ....................................................... 5-85
Specifications and Capacities .......................... 5-103
Speedometer .................................................. 3-26
12
Split Folding Rear Seat .................................... 1-10
StabiliTrak® System .......................................... 4-6
Start Vehicle, Remote ....................................... 2-7
Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-21
Steering ........................................................ 4-10
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-117
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6
Storage Areas
Center Console ........................................... 2-42
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-48
Cupholders ................................................. 2-42
Glove Box .................................................. 2-42
Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-43
Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover ......... 2-45
Rear Seat Armrest ....................................... 2-47
Table ......................................................... 2-47
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-20
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-16
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-49
T
Table ............................................................ 2-47
Tachometer .................................................... 3-26
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps .... 5-47
Text Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-6
Theft-Deterrent Feature .................................. 3-117
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-16
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-17
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............ 2-17
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation ................................................ 2-18
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Time, Setting .................................................. 3-65
Tire
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-33
Tires ............................................................. 5-51
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning ................................................. 5-94
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-68
Chains ....................................................... 5-74
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-76
Cleaning .................................................... 5-94
Compact Spare ........................................... 5-87
Different Size .............................................. 5-70
High-Speed Operation .................................. 5-60
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-75
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-58
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-66
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-79
Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-62
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-61
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-79
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-77
Sidewall Labeling ......................................... 5-52
Tires (cont.)
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-85
Terminology and Definitions ........................... 5-55
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-71
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-72
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-72
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-67
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-27
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-34
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-27
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-7
Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-32
StabiliTrak® System ....................................... 4-6
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-21
Transmission Operation, Automatic ............ 2-24, 2-27
Transportation Program, Courtesy ...................... 7-11
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-26
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-71
13
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-4
Loading ...................................................... 4-21
Running While Parked .................................. 2-36
Service Soon Light ...................................... 3-40
Symbols ......................................................... iii
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-18
Vehicle Data Recording,
Radio Frequency (RFID) ............................... 7-19
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-96
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-96
Vehicle Personalization
DIC ........................................................... 3-57
Vehicle, Remote Start ....................................... 2-7
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-23
Visors ........................................................... 2-16
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-72
Different Size .............................................. 5-70
Replacement ............................................... 5-72
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................... 5-67
Where to Put the Child Restraint ....................... 1-40
Windows ....................................................... 2-14
Power ........................................................ 2-15
Windshield
Washer ........................................................ 3-9
Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-31
Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-49
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-93
Wiper Fuses ............................................... 5-97
Wipers ......................................................... 3-8
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-17
Wipers
Rear Washer .............................................. 3-10
X
W
XM Radio Messages ....................................... 3-96
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 3-24
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-49
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
14
Y